E3 Owners Manual Eng..

E3 Owners Manual Eng..
SPECIAL MESSAGE SECTION
PRODUCT SAFETY MARKINGS: Yamaha electronic products may have either labels similar to the graphics
shown below or molded/stamped facsimiles of these
graphics on the enclosure. The explanation of these
graphics appears on this page. Please observe all cautions indicated on this page and those indicated on the
safety instruction section.
SEE BOTTOM OF ENCLOSURE OR LOWER FRONT
PANEL FOR GRAPHIC SYMBOL MARKINGS
The exclamation point within the equilateral triangle is intended to alert the
user to the presence of important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the
product.
The lightning flash with arrowhead
symbol within the equilateral triangle
is intended to alert the user to the presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within the product’s enclosure
that may be of sufficient magnitude to
constitute a risk of electrical shock.
IMPORTANT NOTICE: All Yamaha electronic products are tested and approved by an independent safety
testing laboratory in order that you may be sure that
when it is properly installed and used in its normal and
customary manner, all foreseeable risks have been eliminated. DO NOT modify this unit or commission others
to do so unless specifically authorized by Yamaha. Product performance and/or safety standards may be diminished. Claims filed under the expressed warranty may be
denied if the unit is/has been modified. Implied warranties may also be affected.
ENVIRONMENTAL ISSUES: Yamaha strives to produce products that are both user safe and environmentally friendly. We sincerely believe that our products and
the production methods used to produce them, meet
these goals. In keeping with both the letter and the spirit
of the law, we want you to be aware of the following:
Battery Notice: This product MAY contain a small nonrechargeable battery which (if applicable) is soldered in
place. The average life span of this type of battery is approximately five years. When replacement becomes neccessary, contact a qualified service representative to
perform the replacement.
Warning: Do not attempt to recharge, disassemble, or
incinerate this type of battery. Keep all batteries away
from children. Dispose of used batteries promptly and as
regulated by applicable laws. Note: In some areas, the
servicer is required by law to return the defective parts.
However, you do have the option of having the servicer
dispose of these parts for you.
Disposal Notice: Should this product become damaged
beyond repair, or for some reason its useful life is considered to be at an end, please observe all local, state,
and federal regulations that relate to the disposal of products that contain lead, batteries, plastics, etc.
NOTICE: Service charges incurred due to lack of
knowledge relating to how a function or effect works
(when the unit is operating as designed) are not covered
by the manufacturer’s warranty, and are therefore the
owners responsibility. Please study this manual carefully
and consult your dealer before requesting service.
NAME PLATE LOCATION: The graphic below indicates the location of the name plate. The model number,
serial number, power requirements, etc., are located on
this plate. You should record the model number, serial
number, and the date of purchase in the spaces provided
below and retain this manual as a permanent record of
your purchase.
HS
YAMAHA CORPORATION MADE IN JAPAN
SPECIFICATIONS SUBJECT TO CHANGE: The
information contained in this manual is believed to be
correct at the time of printing. However, Yamaha reserves the right to change or modify any of the specifications without notice or obligation to update existing
units.
92-469
1
PATENTS
Model _________________________________________
Serial No. ______________________________________
Purchase Date __________________________________
SECTION DE MESSAGE SPÉCIAL
INSCRIPTIONS DE SÉCURITÉ DU PRODUIT: Les
produits électroniques Yamaha peuvent comporter des
étiquettes semblables aux représentations graphiques indiquées ci-dessous ou fac-similés moulés/estampés de
ces représentations graphiques sur l’encoffrement. L’explication de ces représentations graphiques apparaît à
cette page. Veuillez respecter toutes les précautions indiquées à cette page et celles indiquées dans la section
des directives de sécurité.
VOIR SOUS L’ENCOFFREMENT OU EN BAS DU
PANNEAU FRONTAL EN CE QUI CONCERNE LES
INSCRIPTIONS DE SYMBOLE GRAPHIQUES
Le point d’exclamation placé dans un triangle équilatéral est destiné à alerter
l’utilisateur de la présence de directives
importantes sur l’utilisation et l’entretien
(dépannage) dans la documentation qui
accompagne le produit.
L’éclair de foudre avec le symbole en
pointe de flèche dans un triangle équilatéral est destiné à alerter l’utilisateur
de la présence d’une “tension dangereuse” non isolée circulant dans
l’encoffrement du produit et qui peut
avoir une puissance suffisante pour
constituer un risque d’électrocution.
NOTIFICATION IMPORTANTE: Tous les produits
électroniques Yamaha sont vérifiés et approuvés par un
laboratoire de contrôle de sécurité indépendant pour que
vous puissiez être sûr que quand il est correctement installé et utilisé de façon normale et habituelle, tous les
risques prévisibles ont été éliminés. NE modifiez PAS
cet appareil ni déléguez d’autres personnes à le faire à
moins d’être autorisé spécifiquement par Yamaha à le
faire. Les performances de ce produit et/ou les normes
de sécurité peuvent être diminuées. Les réclamations
soumises sous les termes de la garantie exprimée peuvent être refusées si l’appareil est ou a été modifié. Des
garanties implicites peuvent également être affectées.
CARACTÉRISTIQUES SUJETTES À MODIFICATION: On pense que les informations contenues dans ce
manuel sont correctes au moment de l’impression.
Cependant, Yamaha se réserve le droit de changer ou de
modifier toute caractéristique sans avis préalable ni obligation de mettre à jour les appareils existants.
PUBLICATION SUR L’ENVIRONNEMENT: Yamaha s’efforce de produire des appareils qui réunissent à la
fois la sécurité à utilisateur et constituent un environnement
convivial. Nous croyons sincèrement que nos produits et
les méthodes de production les produisaient, atteignent ces
buts. En accord avec la lettre et l’esprit de la loi, nous voulons que vous vous rendiez compte de ce qui suit :
Notification relative à la batterie: Ce produit PEUT contenir une petite batterie non-rechargeable qui (quand ceci
est applicable) est soudée en place. La durée moyenne de
ce type de batterie est approximativement de cinq ans.
Quand le remplacement devient nécessaire, prenez contact
avec un technicien qualifié pour exécuter le remplacement.
Avertissement: N’essayez pas de recharger, démonter
ou incinérer ce type de batterie. Maintenez toutes les batteries hors de la portée des enfants. Mettez les batteries
usées au rebut et promptement conformément aux obligations imposées par les lois applicables. Remarque:
Dans certains secteurs, il est exigé par la loi que le préposé à l’entretien renvoie les pièces défectueuses.
Cependant, vous avez l’option que le préposé à l’entretien mette ces pièces au rebut pour vous.
Notification de mise au rebut: Si ce produit était endommagé au delà de la possibilité du dépannage, ou
pour quelque raison si sa durée de vie utile est considérée comme arrivant à terme, veuillez respecter la réglementations d’état, locale et fédérale et qui est
associée à la mise au rebut des produits qui contiennent
du plomb, des batteries, des plastiques, etc.
NOTIFICATION: Les frais administratifs encourus en
raison d’un manque de connaissance concernant la façon
dont une fonction ou des effets réagissent (quand l’appareil est utilisé comme conçu) ne sont pas couverts par la
garantie du constructeur, et incombent pour cette raison
la responsabilité des propriétaires. Veuillez étudier attentivement ce manuel et consultez votre distributeur
avant de demander un dépannage.
EMPLACEMENT DE LA PLAQUE SIGNALÉTIQUE: La représentation graphique ci-dessous indique
l’emplacement de la plaque signalétique. Le numéro de
modèle, le numéro de série, les conditions d’alimentation électrique, etc., sont mentionnées sur cette plaque.
Vous devriez enregistrer le numéro de modèle, le
numéro de série et la date de l’achat dans les espaces
fournis ci-dessous et conserver ce manuel comme relevé
permanent de votre achat.
HS
YAMAHA CORPORATION MADE IN JAPAN
PATENTS
Modèle ________________________________________
Numéro de série ________________________________
Date d’achat ____________________________________
92-469
1
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
WARNING — When using any electrical or electronic
product, basic precautions should always be followed. These
precautions include, but are not limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Read these instructions.
8.
Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other apparatus (including amplifiers) that produce heat.
9.
Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or
grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has two
blades with one wider than the other. A grounding
type plug has two blades and a third grounding
prong. The wide blade or the third prong are provided for your safety. If the provided plug does not
fit into your outlet, consult an electrician for replacement of the obsolete outlet.
Keep these instructions.
Heed all warnings.
Follow all instructions.
Do not use this apparatus near water.
Clean only with dry cloth.
Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
the power cord from being walked on or
10. Protect
pinched particularly at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point where they exit from the apparatus.
use attachments/accessories specified by the
11. Only
manufacturer.
only with the cart, stand, tripod,
12. Use
bracket, or table specified by the
manufacturer, or sold with the apparatus. When a cart is used, use caution
when moving the cart/apparatus combination to avoid injury from tip-over.
this apparatus during lightning storms or
13. Unplug
when unused for long periods of time.
all servicing to qualified service personnel.
14. Refer
Servicing is required when the apparatus has been
damaged in any way, such as power-supply cord or
plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects
have fallen into the apparatus, the apparatus has
been exposed to rain or moisture, does not operate
normally, or has been dropped.
product shall not be exposed to dripping or
15. This
splashing and that no objects filled with liquids,
such as vases, shall be placed on the apparatus.
not put burning items, such as candles, on the
16. Do
apparatus.
92-469-DK
2
not place this product or any other objects on
17. Do
the power cord or place it in a position where anyone could walk on, trip over, or roll anything over
power or connecting cords of any kind. The use of
an extension cord is not recommended! If you must
use an extension cord, the minimum wire size for a
25’ cord (or less) is 18 AWG. NOTE: The smaller
the AWG number, the larger the current handling
capacity. For longer extension cords, consult a local
electrician.
— To reduce the risk of fire or electric
18. WARNING
shock, do not expose this apparatus to rain or moisture.
should be taken that objects do not fall and liq19. Care
uids are not spilled into the enclosure through any
openings that may exist.
product, either alone or in combination with an
20. This
amplifier and headphones or speaker/s, may be capable of producing sound levels that could cause
permanent hearing loss. DO NOT operate for a long
period of time at a high volume level or at a level
that is uncomfortable. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, you should consult an
audiologist. IMPORTANT: The louder the sound,
the shorter the time period before damage occurs.
Yamaha products may have benches and/or
21. Some
accessory mounting fixtures that are either supplied
as a part or the product or as optional accessories.
Some of these items are designed to be dealer assembled or installed. Please make sure that benches
are stable and any optional fixtures (where applicable) are well secured BEFORE using. Benches supplied by Yamaha are designed for seating only. No
other uses are recommended.
product shall be connected to a MAINS socket
22. This
outlet with a protective earthing connection.
product has a power switch for shutting off all
23. This
system. The switch is located on the Power Supply
Unit nearby the entrance of the AC cord. Note that
the switch on the Controller does not shutdown all
system.
sure that the plug of the Power Supply Unit’s
24. Make
power cable can easily be disconnected from the
AC outlet as a measure of precaution.
Battery
– Danger of explosion if battery incorrectly replaced.
Replace only with the same type.
Outlets for Speakers
– Connect speakers of 2A or less of totals. Do not connect other products except speakers.
– Consult Yamaha service technician when using the
outlets outside the purchased area.
PLEASE KEEP THIS MANUAL
INSTRUCTIONS DE SÉCURITÉ IMPORTANTES
AVERTISSEMENT — Lors de l’utilisation de n’importe
quel appareil électrique ou électronique, les précautions
fondamentales devraient toujours être suivies. Ces précautions comprennent, mais ne sont pas limitées à, ce qui suit:
placez ce produit ni aucun autre objet sur le cordon
17. Ne
d’alimentation secteur ou ne le placez pas dans une position où n’importe qui pourrait marcher dessus,
trébucher dedans ou faire rouler n’importe quoi sur les
cordons d’alimentation en aucune manière. L’utilisation d’un cordon prolongateur n’est pas recommandée
! Si vous devez utiliser un cordon prolongateur, la taille
minimum du calibre de fil du cordon pour un cordon de
25 pouces (ou moins) est de 18 du calibrage américain
normalisé. REMARQUE: Plus le numéro du calibrage
américain normalisé est petit, plus la capacité de gestion de l’intensité est grande. Pour de plus longs cordons prolongateurs, consultez un électricien local.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Lisez ces directives.
8.
N’installez près d’aucune source de chaleur telle que
des radiateurs, des registres de chaleur, des appareils
de chauffage ou d’autres appareils (amplificateurs y
compris) qui produisent de la chaleur.
soin tout particulier devrait être pris pour qu’aucun
19. Un
objet ne tombe et que des liquides ne soient renversés
N’asservissez pas l’objectif de sécurité de la prise de
type polarisée ou de mise à la terre. Une prise polarisée a deux lames avec une plus large que l’autre. Une
prise de type à mise à la terre a deux lames et une
troisième lame de mise à la terre. La lame large ou la
troisième lame est prévue pour votre sécurité. Si la
prise fournie ne s’ajuste pas dans votre prise secteur,
consultez un électricien pour le remplacement de l’ancien modèle de prise.
produit, individuel ou en combinaison avec un am20. Ce
plificateur et des écouteurs ou le ou les haut-parleurs,
9.
Conservez ces directives.
Observez tous les avertissements.
Suivez toutes les directives.
N’utilisez pas cet appareil près de l’eau.
Nettoyez seulement avec un tissu sec.
Ne bloquez aucune des ouvertures de ventilation. Installez conformément aux directives du constructeur.
le cordon d’alimentation de secteur afin que
10. Protégez
personne ne puisse marcher ni le pincer en particulier
les prises, les prises de courant et la position où il quitte de l’appareil.
seulement les équipements ou accessoires in11. Utilisez
diqués par le constructeur.
seulement avec le chariot, le
12. Utilisez
support, le trépied, la platine de fixation ou la table indiquée par le constructeur, ou vendue avec l’appareil.
Quand un chariot est utilisé, faites attention en déplaçant la combinaison
chariot/appareil pour éviter de se
blesser en renversant l’appareil.
cet appareil pendant les orages et la fou13. Débranchez
dre ou s’il est inutilisé pendant de longues périodes.
14.
Confiez toutes les opérations d’entretien au personnel
de service qualifié. L’entretien est exigé quand l’appareil a été endommagé de quelque façon que ce soit,
comme par exemple l’endommagement du cordon ou
de la prise d’alimentation secteur, quand du liquide a
été renversé ou que des objets sont tombés dans l’appareil, l’appareil a été exposé à la pluie ou à l’humidité,
ne fonctionne pas normalement ou est tombé par terre.
produit ne doit pas être exposé à un suintement ou
15. Ce
des éclaboussures et aucun objet rempli de liquide, tels
que des vases, ne doit être mis sur l’appareil.
mettez pas des articles brûlants, tels que des bou16. Ne
gies, sur l’appareil.
— Pour réduire les risques d’in18. AVERTISSEMENT
cendie ou de décharge électrique, n’exposez pas cet
appareil à la pluie ou à l’humidité.
dans l’encoffrement par aucune des ouvertures qui
peuvent exister.
risque de produire des niveaux sonores qui pourraient
causer une perte d’auditive permanente. NE PAS
mettre en service pendant une longue période à un
niveau de volume élevé ou à un niveau qui est inconfortable. Si vous éprouvez n’importe quelle sorte de
perte auditive ou de sonnerie dans les oreilles, vous
devriez consulter un audiologiste. IMPORTANT :
Plus le son est fort, plus la période de temps avant que
les dégâts se produisent est courte.
produits Yamaha peuvent avoir des supports et/
21. Certains
ou des accessoires d’installation complémentaires qui
sont fournis comme partie du produit ou en tant qu’accessoires optionnels. Certains de ces articles sont conçus
pour être montés ou installés par le distributeur. Veuillez
vous assurer que les supports sont stables et que tous les
accessoires optionnels (quand ceci est applicable) sont
bien fixés AVANT l’utilisation. Les supports fournis
par Yamaha sont conçus pour un positionnement seulement. Aucune autre utilisation n’est recommandée.
produit doit être connecté à une prise de sortie secteur
22. Ce
munie d’une connexion protectrice par la mise à la terre.
produit est muni d’un interrupteur d’alimentation
23. Ce
permettant de couper l’alimentation de tout le
système. L’interrupteur d’alimentation est installé sur
le bloc d’alimentation tout près l’entrée du cordon
d’alimentation secteur. Notez que l’interrupteur d’alimentation sur le contrôleur n’arrête tout le système.
que la prise du cordon d’alimentation
24. Assurez-vous
électrique du bloc d’alimentation peut facilement être
débranchée de la prise de sortie secteur comme mesure
de précaution.
Batterie
– Risque d’explosion si la batterie n’est pas remplacée comme
il faut. Remplacez seulement par le même type de batterie.
Prises de sortie pour des haut-parleurs
– Connectez des haut-parleurs de 2A ou moins au total. Ne
connectez aucun autre produit excepté des haut-parleurs.
– Consultez le technicien de service Yamaha quand des
prises sont utilisées en dehors du secteur d’achet.
92-469-DK
2
VEUILLEZ CONSERVER CE MANUEL
IMPORTANT NOTICE FOR THE UNITED KINGDOM
Connecting the Plug and Cord
IMPORTANT: The wires in mains lead are coloured in accordance
with the following code:
GREEN-AND-YELLOW : EARTH
BLUE
: NEUTRAL
BROWN
: LIVE
As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus may
not correspond with the coloured markings identifying the
terminals in your plug, proceed as follows:
The wire which is coloured GREEN and YELLOW must be
connected to the terminal in the plug which is marked by the letter
E or by the safety earth symbol or coloured GREEN and
YELLOW.
The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the
terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK.
The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the
terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED.
The control unit is classified as a Class 1 laser product. One of the
labels below is located on the inside of the CD drive unit.
L’unité de commande est classée produit laser de Classe 1. Une des
étiquettes ci-dessous ou une étiquette similaire se trouve à l’intérieur
du lecteur de CD.
CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT
LASER KLASSE 1
LUOKAN 1 LASERLAITE
KLASS 1 LASER APPARAT
APAREIL A LASER DE CLASSE 1
EN60825
CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT
LASER KLASSE 1
Laser Diode Properties
* Material: GaAIAs
* Wavelength: 790 nm
* Laser Output Power at the lens of the Laser Pick Up Unit: max.
0.2 mW
Propriétés de la diode à semi-conducteur
* Matériau : GaAlAs
* Longueur d’ondes : 790 nm
* Puissance de sortie laser à la lentille du capteur laser : 0.2 mW
max.
CAUTION—Use of controls or adjustments or performance of
procedures other than those specified herein may result in
hazardous radiation exposure.
ATTENTION—L’utilisation de commandes ou de réglages, ou
l’exécution de procédures, autres que celles qui sont spécifiées ici
peuvent conduire à une exposition à des rayonnements dangereux.
Information for Users on Collection and Disposal of Old Equipment and used Batteries
These symbols on the products, packaging, and/or accompanying documents mean that used electrical and electronic
products and batteries should not be mixed with general household waste.
For proper treatment, recovery and recycling of old products and used batteries, please take them to applicable
collection points, in accordance with your national legislation and the Directives 2002/96/EC and 2006/66/EC.
By disposing of these products and batteries correctly, you will help to save valuable resources and prevent any
potential negative effects on human health and the environment which could otherwise arise from inappropriate
waste handling.
For more information about collection and recycling of old products and batteries, please contact your local
municipality, your waste disposal service or the point of sale where you purchased the items.
[For business users in the European Union]
If you wish to discard electrical and electronic equipment, please contact your dealer or supplier for further
information.
[Information on Disposal in other Countries outside the European Union]
These symbols are only valid in the European Union. If you wish to discard these items, please contact your local
authorities or dealer and ask for the correct method of disposal.
Note for the battery symbol (bottom two symbol examples):
This symbol might be used in combination with a chemical symbol. In this case it complies with the requirement set
by the Directive for the chemical involved.
Information concernant la Collecte et le Traitement des piles usagées et des déchets d’équipements
électriques et électroniques
Les symboles sur les produits, l’emballage et/ou les documents joints signifient que les produits électriques ou
électroniques usagés ainsi que les piles ne doivent pas être mélangés avec les déchets domestiques habituels.
Pour un traitement, une récupération et un recyclage appropriés des déchets d’équipements électriques et
électroniques et des piles usagées, veuillez les déposer aux points de collecte prévus à cet effet, conformément à la
réglementation nationale et aux Directives 2002/96/EC et 2006/66/EC.
En vous débarrassant correctement des déchets d’équipements électriques et électroniques et des piles usagées, vous
contribuerez à la sauvegarde de précieuses ressources et à la prévention de potentiels effets négatifs sur la santé
humaine qui pourraient advenir lors d’un traitement inapproprié des déchets.
Pour plus d’informations à propos de la collecte et du recyclage des déchets d’équipements électriques et
électroniques et des piles usagées, veuillez contacter votre municipalité, votre service de traitement des déchets ou le
point de vente où vous avez acheté les produits.
[Pour les professionnels dans l’Union Européenne]
Si vous souhaitez vous débarrasser des déchets d’équipements électriques et électroniques veuillez contacter votre
vendeur ou fournisseur pour plus d’informations.
[Information sur le traitement dans d’autres pays en dehors de l’Union Européenne]
Ces symboles sont seulement valables dans l’Union Européenne. Si vous souhaitez vous débarrasser de déchets
d’équipements électriques et électroniques ou de piles usagées, veuillez contacter les autorités locales ou votre
fournisseur et demander la méthode de traitement appropriée.
Note pour le symbole « pile » (deux exemples de symbole ci-dessous) :
Ce symbole peut être utilisé en combinaison avec un symbole chimique. Dans ce cas il respecte les exigences établies
par la Directive pour le produit chimique en question.
COMPLIANCE INFORMATION STATEMENT
(DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY PROCEDURE)
Responsible Party
Address
Telephone
Fax
Type of Equipment
Model Name
: Yamaha Corporation of America
: 6600 Orangethorpe Avenue, Buena Park, CA 90620 USA
: 1-714-522-9011
: 1-714-522-9301
: Player Piano
: DGB1KE3, DGC1E3, DGC2E3, DC1E3, DC2E3, DU1E3, DYUS1E3
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subjected to the following conditions;
1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and
2) this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesigned operation.
See user manual instructions if interference to radio reception is suspected.
The above statements apply ONLY to those products distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its subsidiaries.
FCC INFORMATION (U.S.A.)
1. IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT!
This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions contained in this manual, meets FCC requirements. Modifications not expressly
approved by Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to use the product.
2. IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to accessories and/or another product use only high quality shielded cables. Cable/s supplied
with this product MUST be used. Follow all installation instructions. Failure to follow instructions could void your FCC authorization to use
this product in the USA.
3. NOTE: This product has been tested and found to comply with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15 for Class “B” digital
devices. Compliance with these requirements provides a reasonable level of assurance that your use of this product in a residential
environment will not result in harmful interference with other electronic devices. This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies and, if not
installed and used according to the instructions found in the users manual, may cause interference harmful to the operation of other electronic
devices. Compliance with FCC regulations does not guarantee that interference will not occur in all installations. If this product is found to be
the source of interference, which can be determined by turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”, please try to eliminate the problem by using one of
the following measures:
Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected by the interference.
Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s.
In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient the antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead, change the lead-in to
coaxial type cable.
If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory results, please contact the local retailer authorized to distribute this type of product. If
you can not locate the appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Corporation of America, Electronic Service Division, 6600 Orangethorpe
Ave, Buena Park, CA 90620
The above statements apply ONLY to those products distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its subsidiaries.
Mounting the Control Unit to the Grand Piano
Installation du boîtier de commande sur un piano à queue
(1)
(2)
(3)
Leave 5 mm of
the shank
(1) Remove the four screws from the sides of the
control unit.
(1) Retirer les quatre vis sur les côtés du boîtier de
commande.
(2) Place the metal suspension bracket, supplied
with the Disklavier grand model, over the
control unit, then secure the metal suspension
bracket to the control unit using the four screws
(4 × 10) supplied with the Disklavier.
(2) Placez la platine de fixation de suspension en
métal, fournie avec le modèle Grand
Disklavier, au-dessus du boîtier de commande,
puis fixez la platine de fixation de suspension
en métal au boîtier de commande en utilisant
les quatre vis (4 × 10) fournies avec le
Disklavier.
(3) Insert the three restraining screws (5 × 12) into
the marked nuts underneath the bass side key
bed, then tighten the screws, leaving a gap of
about 5 mm between head of the screw and
piano body.
Notes:
1) Handle the metal suspension bracket and the
control unit carefully to avoid scratches.
2) Screws;
For suspension bracket installation:
Flat head (4 × 10) × 4
For control unit suspension:
Bind head (5 × 12) × 3
3) When mounted correctly, the control unit is
angled approximately 18° above horizontal.
(3) Introduire les trois vis de fixation (5 × 12) dans
les écrous marqués sous le clavier du côtés de la
basse, puis serrer les vis en laissant un espace
d’environ 5 mm entre la tête de la vis et le corps
du piano.
Remarques:
1) Manipuler soigneusement le support
métallique et le boîtier de commande pour
éviter les rayures.
2) Vis de fixation;
Pour l'installation de la platine de fixation de
suspension:
Tête plate (4 × 10) × 4
Pour la suspension du unité de commande:
Tête de grippage (5 × 12) × 3
3) Lorsqu’il est monté correctement, le boîtier
de commande est incliné d’environ 18° sur
l’horizontale.
(4) (5)
(6)
(4) Fit the “slots” of the metal suspension bracket
containing the control unit to the screws
mentioned in step (3).
(4) Glisser les « fentes » du support métallique
contenant le boîtier de commande sur les vis
mentionnées à l’étape (3).
(5) After mounting the control unit, push the
control unit back as far as it will go and then
tighten the three screws to secure the bracket.
(5) Après avoir installé le boîtier de commande,
l’enfoncer jusqu’à l’extrémité et serrer les trois
vis pour fixer le support.
(6) Connect the cables extending from the piano to
the appropriate connectors/jacks on the rear
panel of the control unit.
(6) Connectez les câbles sortant du piano aux
connecteurs ou aux prises appropriées sur le
panneau arrière de l’unité de commande.
• Coaxial cable: to the TO PIANO connectors
• Câble coaxial : aux connecteurs TO PIANO
• Speaker cord*: to the OUTPUT jacks
• Cordon de haut-parleur*: aux prises OUTPUT
*
*
Only for models supplied with the monitor speakers.
Seulement pour les modèles fournis avec les hautparleurs de contrôle.
Mounting an Optional USB Floppy Disk Drive to the
Grand Piano
Installation d’unité de disquette USB optionnelle sur le
piano à queue
(1)
(2)
Adhesive tape
Ruban adhésif
(3)
USB cable
Câble USB
(1) Remove the backing papers from the adhesive
tape inside the case, and fit the floppy disk
drive into the case.
(1) Enlevez les papiers arrière du ruban adhésif à
l’intérieur du boîtier et insérez l’unité de
disquette dans le boîtier.
(2) Attach the drive and case assembly to the
bottom of the control unit, using the four
screws (3 × 6) supplied with the Disklavier.
(2) Fixez l’ensemble de lecteur et de boîtier au
fond de l’unité de commande en utilisant les
quatre vis (3 × 6) fournies avec le Disklavier.
(3) Connect the USB cable extending from the
drive to the USB port on the rear panel of the
control unit.
(3) Raccordez le câble USB sortant du lecteur au
port USB sur le panneau arrière de l’unité de
commande.
Notes:
1) The case is supplied with the USB floppy disk
drive.
2) Use the screws (3 × 6) supplied with the
Disklavier when attaching.
Remarques:
1) Le boîtier est fourni avec l’unité de disquette
USB.
2) Utilisez les vis de fixation (3 × 6) fournies
avec le Disklavier au moment de faire la
fixation.
English
Operation manual
Welcome to the Yamaha DisklavierTM!
Thank you for purchasing the Yamaha Disklavier piano!
The Disklavier is a fascinating instrument that integrates a classic Yamaha acoustic piano with innovative
electronics to suit your entertainment, educational, and creative needs, while retaining the tone, touch and
long-term value that have long made Yamaha pianos the world’s finest.
English
Before using your Disklavier piano, please read this manual thoroughly and retain it for future reference.
■ Notes on Source Code Distribution
For three years after the factory shipment, you may request from Yamaha the source code for any portions
of the product which are licensed under the GNU General Public License by writing to the following address:
1480 Ryoke, Kakegawa, Shizuoka, 436-0038, JAPAN
Piano International Sales Division, YAMAHA Corporation
The source code will be provided at no charge; however, we may require you to reimburse Yamaha for the
cost of delivering the source code to you.
The source code download is also available on the following website:
http://www.global.yamaha.com/download/disklavier_e3/
• Note that we shall bear no responsibility whatsoever for any damage arising from changes (additions/
deletions) made to the software for this product by a third party other than Yamaha (or party authorized by
Yamaha).
• Note that re-use of source code released to the public domain by Yamaha is unguaranteed, and Yamaha
shall not bear any responsibility whatsoever for the source code.
■ Trademarks & Copyrights
• The contents of this operation manual and the copyrights thereof are under exclusive ownership by
Yamaha Corporation.
• Yamaha, Disklavier, Silent, PianoSoft, PianoSoft·Plus, and PianoSoft·PlusAudio are trademarks of
Yamaha Corporation.
• SmartKey, CueTIME, and You Are The Artist are trademarks of Yamaha Corporation or Yamaha
Corporation of America.
• Disklavier E3 software, Copyright © 2008 Yamaha Corporation.
• This contains programs licensed under the GNU General Public License, GNU Lesser General Public
License, the BSD Copyright, the Artistic License, and the others.
• This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit.
(http://www.openssl.org/)
• Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries.
• Macintosh and Mac OS are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
• The company names and product names in this operation manual are the trademarks or registered
trademarks of their respective companies.
i
Important Precautions
Read the following before operating the Disklavier.
■ Warnings
■ Cautions
• Do not locate the Disklavier in a place subject to
excessive heat, low temperatures, or direct
sunlight. This could be a fire hazard and may
damage the finish and internal parts.
• Turn off all audio devices when connecting to
the Disklavier. Refer to the user’s guide for each
device. Use the correct cables and connect as
specified.
• Excessive humidity or dust can lead to fire or
electric shock.
• Set the volume level on all the devices to
minimum before applying power.
• Connect the plug on the Disklavier power cable
to a compatible AC outlet. Failure to do so will
present a fire and electric shock hazard. If the
power cable plug is not compatible with your AC
outlet, consult your dealer.
• Do not play the Disklavier at a high volume for
extended periods; you may damage your
hearing. This is especially important when using
headphones. If you think your hearing ability is
impaired, consult your doctor.
• Do not plug several devices into the same AC
outlet. This can overload the AC outlet, and lead
to fire and electric shock hazard. It may also
affect the performance of some devices.
• If the Disklavier is worked extremely hard —that
is, prolonged playback of very “busy” songs —
the Disklavier’s thermal relay may trip. The
thermal relay will automatically reset when the
Disklavier has cooled down.
• Do not place heavy objects on the power cable.
A damaged power cable is a potential fire and
electric shock hazard. If the power cable runs
under a carpet, make sure heavy objects,
including the Disklavier, are not placed on top of
the cable.
• If the power cable is damaged (i.e. cut or a bare
wire is exposed), ask your dealer for a
replacement. Using the Disklavier in this
condition is a fire and shock hazard.
• When disconnecting the power cable from an
AC outlet, always pull from the plug. Never pull
the cable. Damaging the cable in this way is a
potential fire and electric shock hazard.
• If a foreign object or water gets inside the
Disklavier turn it off immediately, and remove
the power plug from the AC outlet. Consult your
dealer.
• If you plan not to use the Disklavier for a long
period of time (such as when you are on
vacation), disconnect the electrical mains.
• The cover of the unit should be removed only by
qualified service technicians.
• Always remove the power plug from the AC
outlet before cleaning the Disklavier. Leaving the
power plug connected presents a risk of electric
shock.
• Do not place liquid containers such as vases,
potted plants, glasses, cosmetic bottles,
medicines, etc., on top of the Disklavier.
• Do not use benzene, thinner, cleaning
detergent, or a chemical cloth to clean the
Disklavier.
• Do not try to modify the Disklavier, as this could
lead to fire or electric shock hazard.
• Do not place metal objects with rubber feet on
top of the Disklavier. The color and finish of the
Disklavier can be damaged.
• When moving the Disklavier to another location,
turn off the power, remove the power plug from
the AC outlet, and remove all cables connected
to external devices.
ii
• If you notice any abnormality — such as smoke,
odor, or noise — turn off the Disklavier
immediately, and remove the power plug from
the AC outlet. Consult your dealer for repair.
• Do not place heavy objects on the Disklavier.
Doing so can damage the Disklavier.
• Use a soft, dry cloth to clean the Disklavier.
However, if you discover a stain, carefully use a
soft damp cloth to remove it.
■ Interference
• The Disklavier uses high-frequency digital
circuits that may cause interference to radios
and TVs placed close to it. If interference does
occur, relocate the affected equipment.
The remote control of this unit is powered by dry
batteries. Improper use or misuse of the dry
batteries can cause the dry batteries to heat up,
leak electrolyte or burst which in turn may result in
a fire, damage to equipment and/or nearby objects
or in burns, injury or other bodily harm. Read
through and familiarize yourself with the following
safety precautions prior to use to ensure correct
usage.
• Remove spent batteries immediately from
equipment. Otherwise, batteries will
overdischarge, causing them to heat up, leak
electrolyte or burst which in turn may result in
damage to nearby objects or in burns, injury or
other bodily harm.
English
■ Handling Batteries
• When the battery-powered unit is not going to be
used for a prolonged period of time, remove the
dry batteries from the unit. Otherwise the
batteries will run down and their electrolyte may
leak, resulting in damage to the unit.
• Dispose of batteries in accordance with the
applicable regulations and ordinances.
• The batteries shall not be exposed to excessive
heat such as sunshine, fire or the like.
• Do not directly touch the chemicals (electrolyte)
which have leaked from dry batteries.
1. If electrolyte from dry batteries has made
contact with your eyes, rinse your eyes
thoroughly with clean water and seek medical
treatment from a physician immediately.
2. If electrolyte from dry batteries has touched
your skin or clothing, rinse it off immediately
with clean water.
3. If electrolyte from dry batteries has found its
way inside your mouth, gargle immediately
and consult a physician.
• Do not install the dry batteries with the “+” and
“–” poles reversed. Misaligning the poles of dry
batteries can lead the dry batteries to be
charged or shorted or it can cause them to heat
up, leak electrolyte or burst which in turn may
result in a fire, damage to nearby objects or in
burns, injury or other bodily harm.
• Use only the designated batteries. Do not use
used batteries with unused batteries or different
types of batteries together. This can cause them
to heat up, leak electrolyte or burst which in turn
may result in a fire or in burns, injury or other
bodily harm. Replace all the dry batteries at the
same time. Do not use new and old dry batteries
together. Do not use different types of batteries
(alkaline and manganese batteries, batteries
made by different manufacturers or different
battery products made by the same
manufacturer) together: this can cause them to
heat up, ignite or leak electrolyte.
Please keep this manual for future reference.
iii
Table of Contents
Chapter 1
Introduction
Adjusting the L/R Balance of Audio..................... 34
Features .................................................................1
Using Timer Play ................................................. 34
Items Supplied with the Disklavier .........................1
Skipping the Blank Part at the Beginning of a
Names of Parts and Their Functions .....................2
Song .................................................................... 38
Basic Disklavier Terminology .................................7
Video Synchronized Playback............................. 39
Adding Disklavier Accompaniment to Commercial
Chapter 2
Getting Started
CD Songs (PianoSmart™ Playback)................... 40
Connecting the Control Unit ...................................8
SmartKey™ Playback ......................................... 40
Connecting the AC Power Cable ...........................8
Using the Remote Control......................................9
Chapter 5
Advanced Piano Playing
Turning On the Disklavier ....................................10
Playing the Disklavier along with the Internal
Setting the Internal Calendar ...............................11
Metronome .......................................................... 42
Turning Off the Disklavier (Standby Mode) ..........13
Playing the Disklavier with an Ensemble Voice... 43
Shutting Down the Disklavier ...............................14
Compatible Media Format for the Removable
Chapter 6
Basic Recording
Media ...................................................................14
Recording a New Song ....................................... 44
Compatible File Format........................................15
Titling a Song ...................................................... 45
Basic Precautions for Using CDs .........................15
Chapter 7
Chapter 3
Basic Song Playback
Advanced Recording
Recording with the Internal Metronome .............. 47
Types of Playable Software .................................16
Recording the Left and Right Parts Separately ... 49
Selecting Medium and Their Contents .................17
Recording the Left and Right Parts Together
Using the Number Keypad ...................................19
(Setting a Split Point) .......................................... 51
Starting Playback .................................................19
Re-Recording One Part....................................... 53
Stopping Playback ...............................................20
Changing the Default Tempo .............................. 54
Pausing Playback ................................................20
Video Synchronized Recording ........................... 56
Fast Preview & Review ........................................22
CD Synchronized Recording ............................... 60
Fast Forward & Reverse ......................................23
Searching a Specific Section of a Song ...............24
Chapter 8
Listening to the DisklavierRadio...........................25
Media Management
Managing Albums ............................................... 61
Adjusting the Volume ...........................................26
Making Copies of Albums ................................... 61
Deleting Albums .................................................. 63
Chapter 4
iv
Advanced Song Playback
Creating a New Album ........................................ 64
Changing the Playback Tempo ............................27
Renaming an Album............................................ 65
Playing Back Songs in a Different Key
Rearranging the Order of Albums ....................... 67
(Transposition) .....................................................27
Managing Songs ................................................. 68
Repeating Song Playback....................................28
Making Copies of Songs ..................................... 68
Repeating a Specific Section of a Song
Deleting Songs .................................................... 70
(A-B Repeat) ........................................................29
Renaming a Song ............................................... 71
Playing Back Only the Desired Piano Part...........30
Rearranging the Order of Songs ......................... 72
Adjusting the Volume Balance among the
Converting Song Format ..................................... 73
Keyboard Playing, Ensemble Sound, and
Changing the Counter Display ............................ 74
Software Playback ...............................................31
Converting MIDI Data to a Standard Form
Adjusting the Pitch of Audio .................................33
(Strip XP)............................................................. 75
Chapter 11 Other Settings
Adding Songs/Albums to the Playlist ...................77
Tuning the Tone Generator
Deleting a Playlist.................................................78
(TG Master Tune).............................................. 108
Creating a New Playlist ........................................79
Switching the Languages for the Screen........... 109
Renaming a Playlist .............................................80
Resetting the Disklavier..................................... 110
Managing Media...................................................81
Diagnosing the Disklavier
Making Copies of the Entire Contents in a
(Maintenance Mode) ......................................... 112
Medium ................................................................82
Updating the Disklavier ..................................... 113
English
Managing Playlists ...............................................76
Deleting the Entire Contents in a Medium............83
the Disklavier........................................................84
Chapter 12 Internal Tone Generator
Voices
Refreshing the Contents in [FromToPC] ..............87
Internal GM/XG Tone Generator Basic Voice
Formatting the Floppy Disk (Optional) .................88
List..................................................................... 115
Making Backups of Songs....................................89
Internal TG3 Tone Generator Basic Voice
Restoring the Backups .........................................90
List..................................................................... 118
Chapter 9
Chapter 13 Troubleshooting .................. 120
Copying Song File from a Personal Computer to
Internet Direct Connection
(IDC) Service
What is Internet Direct Connection (IDC)?...........92
Chapter 14 Error Messages ................... 123
Obtaining an ID and Password for the IDC Service
(IDC Registration) ................................................92
Chapter 15 Glossary ................................. 124
Connecting the Disklavier to the Internet .............92
Accessing the Internet..........................................94
Chapter 16 Specifications ...................... 127
Checking Your Account Information.....................95
Updating the Disklavier Using the Internet...........96
Setting the Disklavier for the Internet
Connection ...........................................................97
Initializing Internet Settings ..................................99
Appendix
Software License Notice ....A-1
MIDI Data Format ..............A-21
MIDI IMPLEMENTATION CHART
Chapter 10 Enhancing the Disklavier by
Hooking Up Other Devices
Hooking Up AV Equipment ................................100
Setting the Disklavier for Audio Data
Reception/Transmission.....................................101
Hooking Up MIDI Devices ..................................103
Setting the Disklavier for MIDI Data
Reception ...........................................................103
Setting the Disklavier for MIDI Data
Transmission......................................................105
Setting the Disklavier for Keyboard Playing
Data Transmission .............................................106
v
Chapter
1
Introduction
Features
English
The Disklavier E3 offers the valuable features that open up your musical possibility to explore. Here are brief
explanations of such features:
Advanced Features for Your Listening Pleasure
• Special music CDs, contain over 17 hours of fantastic music, let you start listening on the day the
Disklavier E3 arrives at your home.
• DisklavierRadio; you can listen to over 11 music channel by streaming broadcasts over the Internet.
Convenient Recording Features to Preserve Your Musical Memories
• Total 128 megabytes of internal memory comes with the Disklavier E3 to preserve your valuable data.
• Connecting external USB devices to the Disklavier E3 allows you to record your performance directly onto
them, or even make backups of your valuable data in the internal memory.
• Video synchronization features offer great listening experience with sights. You can see as well as hear
performances with perfectly synchronized audio and video.
Simple and Easy-to-use Features Enhancing Your Performance
• The remote control, with clear and logical layout of buttons, lets you quickly enjoy the features of the
Disklavier E3.
• The display on the front panel employs an organic electro-luminescent display which makes it brighter
and more easily readable than ever.
Items Supplied with the Disklavier
Check that the following items are supplied with your Disklavier:
• 1 Control unit
• 1 Control unit suspension bracket*1
• 4 Screws for control unit suspension bracket installation (4 × 10)*1
• 3 Screws for control unit suspension (5 × 12)*1
• 4 Screws for optional USB floppy disk drive installation (3 × 6)*1
• 2 Monitor speakers*2
• 1 Monitor speaker installation kit*2
• 2 Speaker cords*2
• 1 Remote control
• 2 Batteries for remote control
• 2 Sample PianoSoft CD software
• 1 Quick reference
• 1 Operation manual
• 1 PianoSoft CD song list
• 1 Music book “50 greats for the Piano”
*1 Only for grand pianos
*2 Only for models supplied with the monitor speakers
1
Chapter
1
Introduction
Names of Parts and Their Functions
■ Control Unit — Front Panel
4
1
2
3
5
6
7
8
9
11
12
[ON/OFF] button
Turns on or shuts down the Disklavier. Press once
to turn it on, and once again to shut it down.
Cursor/[ENTER] buttons
Cursor: Used to select options and parameters.
[ENTER]: Used to execute the selection.
2
USB port
Used to connect a USB flash memory, etc.
11
Display
Shows various information.
Remote control sensor
When using the remote control, point it toward this
sensor.
Dial
Used to adjust the volume, and to set parameter
values.
1
3
CD drive
Insert a PianoSoft·PlusAudio or other audio or
audio/MIDI CD here.
4
CD eject button
Used to open the CD drive.
5
[PLAY/PAUSE] button
Used to start and pause playback.
6
[STOP] button
Used to stop playback and recording.
7
8
[RECORD] button
Used to engage the record standby mode before
recording starts.
[SELECT] button
Used to select media.
9
2
10
10
12
Chapter
Introduction
1
■ Control Unit — Rear Panel
1
2
3
4
5
6
English
7
8
9
10
11
USB TO DEVICE port
Used to connect a USB flash memory, an optional
USB floppy disk drive, etc.
MIDI OUT terminal
Used to connect external MIDI equipment for
outputting MIDI data.
2
LAN port
Used to connect to the Internet.
11
MIDI IN terminal
Used to connect external MIDI equipment for
inputting MIDI data.
1
OUTPUT jacks
Used to connect the speaker cord from the monitor
speakers*
10
3
* Only for models supplied with the monitor speakers.
ANALOG MIDI IN jacks
Used to connect the audio equipment such as an
external CD changer.
4
OMNI (SYNC) OUT jacks
Used to connect the microphone/line input of a
camcorder.
5
OMNI (SYNC) IN jacks
Used to connect the audio output of a camcorder.
6
7
TO PIANO connectors
Used to connect the piano.
DC-IN 12V connector
Used to connect to the power supply unit.
8
USB TO HOST port
Used to connect the USB cable from a computer.
9
3
Chapter
1
Introduction
■ Remote Control
1
13
2
14
15
16
3
17
4
18
5
19
20
6
21
7
22
8
9
23
24
10
25
26
11
12
27
1
[ON/STANDBY] button
Turns on the Disklavier or puts it in the standby
mode.
5
[RECORD] button
Used to engage the record standby mode before
recording starts.
Number keypad
Used for direct album/song selection and to enter a
start time for song playback.
[PLAY] button
Used to start playback.
2
6
[REVERSE]/[FORWARD] buttons
In the play mode: used to fast preview and review.
In the pause mode: used to fast forward and
reverse.
7
[SYSTEM] button
Used to access the system menu.
3
[VOICE] button
Used to access the voice function.
4
4
Cursor buttons
Used to select options and parameters.
8
Chapter
Introduction
9
[BACK] button
Used to cancel the selection, and return to the
previous screen.
1
20
[PAUSE] button
Used to pause playback.
[STOP] button
Used to stop playback and recording.
21
[VOLUME] buttons
Used to adjust the volume.
[–] lowers the volume, [+] raises the volume.
10
[TRANSPOSE] buttons
Used to transpose song playback.
[–] transposes down, [+] transposes up, and [0]
resets the transposition value to 00.
12
[INTERNET] button
Used to access the Internet menu.
English
11
[TEMPO] buttons
Used to change the playback tempo.
[–] decreases the tempo, [+] increases the tempo,
and [0] resets the tempo to 00.
[ENTER] button
Used to execute the selection.
22
[FUNC.] button
Used to access the function menu.
23
24
[SELECT] button
Used to select media.
[+/YES]/[–/NO] buttons
Used to select parameters, adjust setting values,
and execute or cancel the selected functions.
25
13
[SEARCH] button
Used to access the search function.
[BALANCE] button
Used to adjust the TG, audio and voice balance.
26
14
15
[SETUP] button
Used to access the setup menu.
27
Color buttons
Yellow: Used to switch character types when titling
albums and songs.
Other: For future use.
[METRONOME] button
Used to access the metronome function.
16
[REPEAT] button
Used to select one of the repeat modes: ALL, RPT,
RND, or OFF.
17
18
[A-B] button
Used to enter A and B points for the A-B repeat
mode.
[PART SELECT] buttons
For L/R and ensemble songs, these buttons are
used to choose which part will play: left-hand part,
right-hand part, or both parts.
They are also used to select a part for recording.
19
5
Chapter
1
Introduction
■ Monitor Speaker*
LOW
1
2
LINE
2
3
LOW/HIGH volume controls
Adjust the base/treble sound volume.
LINE1/2 volume controls
Adjust the sound volume for each line input.
Power indicator
Lights up while the speaker is turned on.
Note: For normal use, turn down the LINE2 volume completely,
and turn up the LINE1 volume at the three o’clock
position.
1
2
* Only for models supplied with the monitor speakers.
6
1
HIGH
3
Chapter
Introduction
1
Basic Disklavier Terminology
The following is a list of several basic Disklavier
words that you may need to know before
proceeding with operational procedures in this
manual. For additional Disklavier terminology, see
the glossary provided in Chapter 15.
PianoSoft·Plus
English
PianoSoft·Plus software contains
prerecorded ensemble songs featuring
instrumental accompaniment that can be played
back on the Disklavier. See your Disklavier dealer
for a PianoSoft catalog.
Ensemble Song
An ensemble song contains the same left- and
right-hand parts as an L/R song, and extra tracks
that are played by the internal XG tone generator.
Accompanying tracks can include acoustic bass,
drums, strings, vibes, etc.
L/R Song
In a L/R song, the left-hand piano part is stored on
track 1 (L) and the right-hand piano part is stored
on track 2 (R). During playback you can cancel
either part, and practice that part yourself. When
recording an L/R song, you can record the two
parts simultaneously or separately.
Memory Disk
The Disklavier has a total of 128 megabytes of
internal flash memory named Memory Disks that
allow you to store song data without a floppy disk.
MIDI
An acronym for Musical Instrument Digital
Interface. MIDI allows electronic musical
instruments to communicate with each other.
PianoSoft
The PianoSoft Disk Collection is a
library of prerecorded song disks made by Yamaha
for use with the Disklavier series. Many titles are
available, and among the many musical styles
included are classical, jazz, and popular. The disk
includes songs for listening enjoyment, piano study
disks for the piano student, and accompaniment
disks for vocal and instrumental practice. PianoSoft
is sometimes used as a generic term for PianoSoft
and PianoSoft·Plus.
PianoSoft·PlusAudio
CD software made by Yamaha
containing audio and MIDI
signals for playing back on the Disklavier.
SmartPianoSoft
Software made by Yamaha
containing MIDI signals for
playing back along with standard audio CDs.
Song
A “song” usually means a short piece of music with
lyrics. However, in the Disklavier manuals the term
“song” is used to refer to any piece of music.
Tone Generator
An electronic device that generates instrument
voices. The Disklavier has an internal XG tone
generator that can produce nearly 700 instrumental
and percussion voices.
Voice
The sounds produced by a tone generator
expressing various instruments.
XG
Yamaha XG is an extension of the GM
(General MIDI) format. With greater polyphony,
more voice, and effects, it improves song
compatibility between MIDI devices. When a song
in the Yamaha XG format is played on another XG
compatible tone generator or synthesizer, it will
play and sound as the original composer/creator
intended.
7
Chapter
2
Getting Started
Connecting the Control Unit
Make sure that the cables extending from the piano is connected to the
appropriate connectors or jacks on the rear panel of the control unit.
Note:
The cables should be connected to
the control unit when the Disklavier
is installed. If, however, it is not,
carefully connect them to the
appropriate connectors or jacks on
the rear panel of the control unit.
Note:
For grand piano models, be sure to
mount the control unit to the
underside of the bass side key bed.
Connecting the AC Power Cable
8
1
Connect the power cord extending from the power supply unit
of the piano to the DC-IN 12V connector of the control unit.
2
Connect the AC power cable extending from the piano to
the AC wall outlet.
Important:
Make sure that the voltage of the AC
wall outlet matches that marked on
the Disklavier’s Serial No. plate.
Chapter
Getting Started
2
Using the Remote Control
The Disklavier is equipped with a remote control which allows convenient
control from almost anywhere in the room. This chapter provides notes on
handling the remote control.
English
■ Installing Batteries in the Remote Control
Before the remote control can be used, the two batteries supplied with the
Disklavier must be installed.
Remove the battery cover from the rear of the remote control, install the
batteries, and then replace the cover.
A diagram inside the battery compartment shows which way the batteries
should be installed. Make sure you insert them correctly.
■ Battery Replacement
When the remote control fails to work from a distance, replace the
batteries.
• Replacement batteries should be UM-3, AA, R6P, or LR6 type.
• Always replace both batteries.
Important:
Be sure to read the section on
“Handling Batteries” on page iii for
details on the safe handling of dry
batteries.
• If the remote control is not to be used for a prolonged period of time,
remove the batteries to prevent possible damage by battery leakage.
■ Using the Remote Control
To use the remote control, point it at the remote control sensor on the
control unit.
Approx. 5 m (16 ft.)
30˚
30˚
30˚
30˚
9
Chapter
2
Getting Started
Turning On the Disklavier
1
Make sure that the main switch on the power supply unit is
turned on.
(Grand piano)
Power supply unit
(located on the bottom)
ON
OFF
MAINS
(Upright piano)
Power supply unit
(located on the rear)
2
Press [ON/OFF] on the control unit.
While the control unit is in the standby mode, you can also turn on
the Disklavier by pressing [ON/STANDBY] on the remote control.
The following message appears on the display, and [ON/OFF] on
the control unit lights green.
After several seconds, the loading screen will appear, and last
selected song will be loaded.
PLEASE WAIT
Your Disklavier is now ready for use.
10
)
See Chapter 2 “Getting Started –
Turning Off the Disklavier (Standby
Mode)” on page 13.
Chapter
Getting Started
2
Setting the Internal Calendar
[SYSTEM]
“TimeZone” and “Clock Adj.”
)
The Disklavier has an internal calendar that can be set from 1/1/1985
00:00:00 to 12/31/2084 23:59:59. Set the calendar accurately so that the
Disklavier displays the correct current time during the stop mode.
Time is displayed in 24-hour format.
English
Setting the correct time is also
important for engaging timercontrolled programs. See Chapter 4
“Advanced Song Playback – Using
Timer Play” on page 34.
■ Time Zone
1
Press [SYSTEM] on the remote control.
The system menu screen appears.
!"#${
2
Select “TimeZone” with the cursor buttons ([
[ ]), then press [ENTER].
][
][
]
!"#${
The time zone setup screen appears.
11
Chapter
2
Getting Started
3
Press [+/YES] and [–/NO] to change the time zone.
Examples of Time Zone
The chart below shows the correspondence between the time zone
setting on the Disklavier and actual time zone used in the U.S. and
Canada.
Setting
Actual Time Zone
GMT-10
Hawaii-Aleutian Standard Time
GMT-9
Alaska Standard Time (AKST)
GMT-8
Alaska Daylight Time (AKDT)
Pacific Standard Time (PST)
GMT-7
Pacific Daylight Time (PDT)
Mountain Standard Time (MST)
GMT-6
Mountain Daylight Time (MDT)
Central Standard Time (CST)
GMT-5
Central Daylight Time (CDT)
Eastern Standard Time (EST)
GMT-4
4
Eastern Daylight Time (EDT)
Press [ENTER].
The time zone is set, and the display returns to the system menu.
Proceed to the calendar setting.
■ Calendar
1
Select “Clock Adj.” with the cursor buttons ([
[ ]), then press [ENTER].
!"#${
The current date and time appear.
12
][
][
]
Note:
The time zone listed here should be
used only as a guide. For more
details, contact your local
observatories.
Chapter
Getting Started
2
2
Press [ENTER].
The time setup screen appears with the cursor flashing on the
hours display.
}{
English
3
Select year, month, date, hours, minutes, and seconds
with the cursor buttons ([ ] [ ]), then press [+/YES] and
[–/NO] to set a value.
}{
4
Press [ENTER].
The date and time are stored in the internal calendar, and the
display returns to the current time screen.
Press [BACK] to return to the system menu screen.
Turning Off the Disklavier (Standby Mode)
Press [ON/STANDBY] on the remote control.
The ending screen appears, and [ON/OFF] on the control unit lights
red.
Note:
Press [ON/STANDBY] on the
remote control to turn the Disklavier
back on.
See you again
13
Chapter
2
Getting Started
Shutting Down the Disklavier
Press [ON/OFF] on the control unit.
Note:
Be sure to wait 5 seconds before
turning the Disklavier back on.
The ending screen appears, and [ON/OFF] on the control unit turns
off.
See you again
Compatible Media Format for the Removable Media
Compact Disc
The Disklavier can play songs on commercial audio CDs and data CDs
(such as PianoSoft·PlusAudio).
• The audio CDs should be formatted in CD-DA.
Note:
If the external medium contains a
number of albums or songs, it may
take some time for the Disklavier to
recognize them.
• The data CDs should be formatted in ISO 9660 Level 1.
USB Flash Memory
You can use commercially available USB flash memories to store song
data. The USB flash memory should be formatted in FAT16 or FAT32 file
system.
USB Hard Disk
You can use commercially available USB hard disk drives to store song
data or make a backup of song data. The USB hard disk drive should be
formatted in FAT32 file system.
Floppy Disk (Optional)
With the optional USB floppy disk drive, you can use 3.5” 2DD or 2HD
floppy disks to store song data. The floppy disk should be formatted in MSDOS.
14
Note:
Yamaha does not assure the
operation of commercially available
USB flash memories or USB hard
disk drives. For a list of compatible
products, please visit:
www.yamaha.com/disklavier.
Note:
Do not insert or remove the USB
media while reading or writing data.
Make sure that reading or writing
has finished before doing so.
Chapter
Getting Started
2
Compatible File Format
The Disklavier can handle these three types of file format:
SMF0
Standard MIDI File format 0 for playback and recording. The name of the
file should have an extension as “.MID” or “.mid.”
English
SMF1
Standard MIDI File format 1 for playback only. The name of the file should
have an extension as “.MID” or “.mid.”
E-SEQ
Format developed by Yamaha, for playback only. The name of the file
should have an extension as “.FIL” or “.fil.”
Basic Precautions for Using CDs
■ Handling CDs
In order to protect data stored on compact discs from damage or loss,
handle them with care, and observe the following precautions.
• Do not touch the surface of a CD.
• Do not expose CDs to extreme temperatures or humidity. The working
temperature range is between 4°C and 52°C (40°F and 125°F).
• Wipe CDs with a clean, dry cloth before playback.
• Remove the CD from the CD drive before turning off the Disklavier.
■ Loading a CD
1
Press the CD eject button on the control unit to open the
CD tray.
CD
CD eject button
2
Place a CD on the tray, and then close the tray.
15
Chapter
3
Basic Song Playback
Types of Playable Software
PianoSoft and PianoSoft·Plus
When piano songs such as those contained in
PianoSoft and PianoSoft·Plus software are played back
on the Disklavier, the piano parts are actually played by the Disklavier
keyboard, and the keys move up and down as though they were being
played by an invisible performer. The ensemble parts (contained in
PianoSoft·Plus software) are played by the internal tone generator and are
heard from the monitor speakers*.
PianoSoft·PlusAudio
PianoSoft·PlusAudio songs are recorded using two
channels, an analog MIDI channel for the piano parts
and an audio channel for instrumentals and vocals. When they are played
back on the Disklavier, the piano parts area played by the Disklavier
keyboard as with PianoSoft and PianoSoft·Plus songs, and all other
instrumental and vocal parts are heard from the monitor speakers* just like
a normal stereo system.
SmartPianoSoft
SmartPianoSoft contains a recorded piano
accompaniment to the commercial CDs, and the acoustic
accompaniment will play back matching with the commercial CD. You can
also record your own accompaniment for your favorite commercial CDs at
home; play your Disklavier as you listen to a CD, and SmartPianoSoft will
match the music together during playback, essentially adding you to
famous performances.
Standard Audio CDs
Standard audio CDs contain two audio channels (L and R), and are both
heard from the monitor speakers* just like a normal stereo system. In other
words, the Disklavier can be used to play CDs in place of a stereo system.
16
* Only for models supplied with
the monitor speaker.
Chapter
Basic Song Playback
3
Selecting Medium and Their Contents
[SELECT]
1
Insert a desired medium.
English
CD
CD eject button
USB flash memory
USB port
2
Press [SELECT].
The media selection screen appears with the current selected
medium highlighted.
=MEDIA SELECT=
or
Control unit
3
Remote control
Memory
?]
CD
Select a desired medium with the cursor buttons ([
[ ]).
]
The following media are available:
Medium
Description
Memory
Internal flash memory
CD
Audio CD or data CD
USB1,
USB2
USB flash memory or USB HDD (USB1 indicates the
first inserted one, and USB2 indicates the second.)
See Chapter 3 “Basic Song Playback
– Listening to the DisklavierRadio”
on page 25.
Playlist
Playlist in the internal flash memory
)
D-Radio
DisklavierRadio
FromToPC
Network folder in the internal flash memory
)
See Chapter 8 “Media Management
– Copying Song File from a
Personal Computer to the
Disklavier” on page 84.
17
Chapter
3
Basic Song Playback
4
Press [ENTER] or [
].
The album selection screen appears.
or
5
][{
Select a desired album with the cursor buttons ([
][
]).
][{
Note:
You can also select albums directly
using the number keypad on the
remote control. See Chapter 3
“Basic Song Playback – Using the
Number Keypad” on page 19.
Album number
Album title
To return to the media selection screen, press [
6
Press [ENTER] or [
Note:
The maximum number of the
selectable albums in a medium is 99.
].
].
The song selection screen appears.
or
7
001:Invention 1
Select a desired song with the cursor buttons ([
[{
001:Invention 1
Song number
Song title
To return to the album selection screen, press [
8
Press [ENTER].
The selected song is loaded.
18
[{
].
][
]).
Note:
The maximum number of the
selectable songs in an album is 999.
Note:
You can also select songs directly
using the number keypad on the
remote control. See Chapter 3
“Basic Song Playback – Using the
Number Keypad” on page 19.
Chapter
Basic Song Playback
3
Using the Number Keypad
Album or song selection screen
Number button
You can also select albums or songs directly with the number keypad on
the remote control.
Note:
If you enter a number higher than
the existed, the last album or song
appears.
English
Press the corresponding number button, then press
[ENTER].
For example, to select album number 5, simply press [5], then
[ENTER].
=ALBUM SELECT= 0-9/ENT
05:
To select song number 36, first press [0], then [3], then [6], then
[ENTER].
036:
Starting Playback
[PLAY]
Press [PLAY/PAUSE] on the control unit or [PLAY] on the
remote control.
[PLAY/PAUSE] on the control unit lights green, and the numerical
value of the counter advances.
or
Control unit
Remote control
=Memory=
A02-001
<00:01>
LR SO V+00
Piano Sonate
At the end of the song, the Disklavier selects the next song
automatically and continues playback.
After playback the last song in the album, playback stops.
19
Chapter
3
Basic Song Playback
Stopping Playback
During playback
[STOP]
Press [STOP].
or
Control unit
Remote control
Playback stops, and the song returns to the beginning.
[PLAY/PAUSE] on the control unit turns off, and the counter is reset
to “00:00” or “001-1.”
Pausing Playback
During playback
1
[PAUSE]
Press [PLAY/PAUSE] on the control unit, or [PAUSE] on
the remote control.
or
Control unit
Remote control
Playback pauses.
[PLAY/PAUSE] on the control unit flashes, and the counter stops
counting.
2
Press [PLAY/PAUSE] on the control unit or [PLAY] on the
remote control to continue playback.
or
Control unit
20
Remote control
Chapter
Basic Song Playback
3
■ Song Playback Screen
Here are a few things that you will often see during playback.
1
2
3
4
5
6
English
7
1
Media
The selected medium is displayed here.
Album/Song Number
The number of the selected album and song is
displayed here.
2
Display
Description
Axx-yyy
xx: album number (01 to 99)
yyy: song number (001 to 999)
Pxx-yyy
xx: playlist number (01 to 99)
yyy: song number (001 to 999)
5
Song Format
The format of the selected song is displayed here.
Display
Description
S0
SMF (Standard MIDI File) format 0
S1
SMF (Standard MIDI File) format 1
ES
E-SEQ format
6
Volume
The current volume setting is displayed here.
Song Title
The title of the selected song is displayed here. If
the title is long, it scrolls across the display.
7
Counter
Playing time is indicated in one of two formats.
3
Display
Description
xx:yy
Minutes (xx) and seconds (yy)
xxx-y
Measures (xxx) and beats (y)
Song Type
The type of the selected songs is displayed here.
4
Display
Description
LR
PianoSoft
XP
PianoSoft recorded on the PRO model
PS
SmartPianoSoft
SK
SmartKey
YM
PianoSoft·PlusAudio
AU
Stereo audio
21
Chapter
3
Basic Song Playback
Fast Preview & Review
During playback
[FORWARD] or [REVERSE]
During playback, fast preview and review allow you to quickly search
through a song while listening to the sound. This is useful for locating a
desired position within a song.
■ Fast Preview
1
To preview, hold [ ] on the control unit or press
[FORWARD] on the remote control.
or
Control unit
2
Remote control
Release [ ] on the control unit, or press [FORWARD] on
the remote control again to return to normal playback.
If a song is previewed all the way to the end, it will be paused at the
end of the song.
■ Fast Review
1
To review, hold [ ] on the control unit or press
[REVERSE] on the remote control.
or
Control unit
2
Remote control
Release [ ] on the control unit, or press [REVERSE] on
the remote control again to return to normal playback.
If a song is reviewed all the way to the beginning, it will be paused
at the beginning of the song.
22
Note:
No sound is produced by the piano
when fast-previewing or reviewing
PianoSoft·PlusAudio CDs.
Chapter
Basic Song Playback
3
Fast Forward & Reverse
Stop or pause mode
[FORWARD] or [REVERSE]
In the stop or pause mode, fast forward and reverse allow you to quickly
locate a desired position in a song.
English
Reverse can also be used to return a song to the beginning, ready to play
again.
■ Fast Forward
1
In the stop or pause mode, hold [ ] on the control unit or
press [FORWARD] on the remote control.
=Memory=
or
Control unit
Remote control
LR SO V+00
<00:15> FORWARD
[PLAY/PAUSE] on the control unit flashes quickly and the counter
shows the current position.
2
Release [ ] on the control unit, or press [FORWARD] on
the remote control again to return to the pause mode.
If you fast forward a song all the way to the end, it will be paused at
the end of the song.
■ Fast Reverse
1
In the stop or pause mode, hold [ ] on the control unit or
press [REVERSE] on the remote control.
=Memory=
or
Control unit
Remote control
LR SO V+00
<02:22> REWIND
[PLAY/PAUSE] on the control unit flashes quickly and the counter
shows the current position.
2
Release [ ] on the control unit, or press [REVERSE] on
the remote control again to return to the pause mode.
If you reverse a song all the way to the beginning, it will be paused
at the beginning of the song.
23
Chapter
3
Basic Song Playback
Searching a Specific Section of a Song
During playback or stop/pause mode
[SEARCH]
Playback can be started from a specified point in a song. Instead of using
fast forward or preview, you can use this function to go directly to a desired
point within a song.
If the current song uses the minutes and seconds time format, you specify
the point in minutes and seconds. If it uses the measures and beats time
format, you specify the point in measures and beats.
1
Press [SEARCH] on the remote control.
The song search screen appears with the counter flashing.
=Memory=
A02-001
<00:00>
0-9/SEARCH
Flashes
The song will be paused at the exact point as you press [SEARCH].
2
Enter the time that you want to search for with the number
keypad.
For example, to search for 2:56 (minutes and seconds), first press
[2], then [5], then [6].
=Memory=
A02-001
<02:56>
0-9/SEARCH
For example, to search for 52-3 (measures and beats), first press
[0], then [5], [2], and [3].
=Memory=
A02-001
<052-3>
3
0-9/SEARCH
Press [SEARCH] again.
The position of the song goes to the specified point.
24
Note:
If you enter a value higher than the
entire song time, the search goes to
the end of the song.
Chapter
Basic Song Playback
3
Listening to the DisklavierRadio
Media selection screen
“D-Radio”
You can listen to streaming broadcasts of music, with many channels of
music contents.
Select “D-Radio” in the media selection screen.
)
The channel selection screen appears.
=RADIO SELECT=
To select a medium, see Chapter 3
“Basic Song Playback – Selecting
Medium and Their Contents” on
page 17.
?=]
01:Introduction Ch
2
Press [
] or [
] or [+/YES] or [–/NO] to select a channel.
or
3
To enjoy the DisklavierRadio, first
you need to connect to the Internet.
See Chapter 9 “Internet Direct
Connection (IDC) Service –
Connecting the Disklavier to the
Internet” on page 92.
English
1
)
Press [ENTER] or [
selected channel.
}][{
], to begin the broadcast of the
The DisklavierRadio screen appears.
Channel
Number Medium
or
=D-Radio=
CH-03:
My
Jazz
Channel Title
Volume
V+00
Funny Val
Song Title
25
Chapter
3
Basic Song Playback
■ Muting the Sound
1
Press [PAUSE] or [STOP].
“MUTE” appears on the upper right of the screen.
=D-Radio=
CH-03:
Jazz
2
MUTE
My Funny Val
or
Press [PAUSE] or [STOP] again to release muting.
or
Adjusting the Volume
[VOLUME +] or [VOLUME –]
You can adjust volume with the control unit or with the remote control as
described below. Since all piano songs are recorded at the maximum
volume level of 0, volume can be decreased down to –10, the softest
volume at which the piano can play.
For ensemble songs, the volume of the piano and internal XG tone
generator are adjusted simultaneously, so it is a good idea to first balance
the volume of the piano and XG tone generator.
For songs on PianoSoft·PlusAudio, you should first balance the volume of
the MIDI piano and audio parts.
1
Note:
This setting does not affect manual
playing.
)
See Chapter 4 “Advanced Song
Playback – Adjusting the Volume
Balance among the Keyboard
Playing, Ensemble Sound, and
Software Playback” on page 31.
Press [VOLUME +] or [VOLUME –] on the remote control.
The main volume setting screen appears.
=BALANCE=
VOLUME-/+
MAIN VOLUME -01
2
Press [VOLUME +] or [VOLUME –] to adjust the volume.
Volume can be adjusted in a range of –10 to 0.
26
Note:
You can also use the dial on the
control unit to adjust the volume.
Note:
When the volume is set to –10, there
may be a slight delay in sound
production following key strokes,
and the Disklavier may skip some
notes. Furthermore, at this volume
setting, touch strength does not
affect note dynamics.
Chapter
4
Advanced Song Playback
Changing the Playback Tempo
[TEMPO –] or [TEMPO +]
Note:
You cannot change the playback
tempo of songs on audio CDs.
These tempo settings remain in effect until recording is started, another
medium or album is selected, or the Disklavier is turned off.
)
1
Press [TEMPO –] or [TEMPO +] on the remote control.
English
You can speed up or slow down the playback tempo. Slowing down the
playback tempo can be useful when practicing a difficult piano part.
Tempo changes to songs that you
have recorded yourself can be made
permanent. See Chapter 7
“Advanced Recording – Changing
the Default Tempo” on page 54.
The tempo setting screen appears.
=Memory=
TEMPO-/0/+
TEMPO +01%
2
Press [TEMPO –] or [TEMPO +] to adjust the tempo.
Note:
You can also use the dial on the
control unit to adjust the tempo.
Playback tempo can be adjusted from –50% to +50% in 1%
increments.
Press [TEMPO 0] to set to the original tempo.
Playing Back Songs in a Different Key (Transposition)
[TRANSPOSE –] or [TRANSPOSE +]
Playback can be transposed up or down by up to two octaves. This is
useful, for example, when you want to sing along (karaoke) in a different
key from the original recording.
Transposition changes remain in effect until recording is started, another
medium or album is selected, or the Disklavier is turned off.
Note:
This function cannot be used to
transpose songs from external
devices connected to the OMNI IN
jacks.
27
Chapter
4
Advanced Song Playback
1
Press [TRANSPOSE –] or [TRANSPOSE +] on the remote
control.
The transposition setting screen appears.
=Memory=
TRANS-/0/+
TRANS +01key
2
Press [TRANSPOSE –] or [TRANSPOSE +] to change the
key.
Playback can be transposed in half-step increments up or down
two octaves (–24 key to +24 key)
Press [TRANSPOSE 0] to set to the original key.
Repeating Song Playback
[REPEAT]
There are three repeat modes (ALL, RPT, RND) as described below. You
can use these functions for entertainment or study purpose.
1
Press [REPEAT] on the remote control.
The repeat setting screen appears.
=Memory=
REPEAT ALL
2
REPEAT
Press [REPEAT] to select repeat modes.
The following options are available:
28
Option
Description
ALL
Repeats all songs on the selected album.
RPT
Repeats selected song.
RND
Shuffles the order of songs on the selected album and
repeats the cycle.
OFF
Plays back songs normally.
Note:
You can also use the dial on the
control unit to adjust the key.
Chapter
Advanced Song Playback
3
Press [PLAY] to start repeat playback.
4
To cancel the repeat mode, press [REPEAT] until “OFF”
appears on the screen.
4
English
Repeating a Specific Section of a Song (A-B Repeat)
During playback
[A-B]
In the A-B repeat, playback is repeated between two specified points in a
song: point A and point B. This function is useful when practicing or
memorizing a difficult section of a song.
Once specified, points A and B are saved until another song is selected,
recording is started, or the Disklavier is turned off.
1
To set point A, play back a song and press [A-B] on the
remote control when the desired point is reached.
Point A is set.
The A-B repeat setting screen appears with the “B” flashing.
=Memory=
A-B
Flashes
2
Note:
You cannot set point B that is
beyond the selected song.
To set point B, press [A-B] again.
Point B is set.
=Memory=
<02:22> A-B
A-B
Playback starts from point A, continues up to point B and, returns to
point A and playback starts repeatedly.
Point B
Point A
SONG 1
SONG 2
SONG 3
Start
Cycle
29
Chapter
4
Advanced Song Playback
3
To cancel the A-B repeat, press [A-B] so that “OFF”
flashes on the screen.
=Memory=
A-B
Note:
The A-B repeat is cancelled if you
escape from the A-B repeat setting
screen by other operations.
Flashes
Pressing [BACK] also cancels the point setting, and returns to the
song playback screen.
Playing Back Only the Desired Piano Part
[PART SELECT L] or [PART SELECT R]
This could be useful, for example, when listening carefully to one part, and
also when you practice only the left- or right-hand part while the Disklavier
plays the other.
■ Cancelling the Piano Part
)
1
Select the desired song.
2
Press [PART SELECT L] or [PART SELECT R] on the
remote control to cancel a part.
To select a song, see Chapter 3
“Basic Song Playback – Selecting
Medium and Their Contents” on
page 17.
The part cancellation screen appears with the corresponding part
canceled.
=Piano Part=
L/R
L=ON R=OFF P=ON
Notes of displays:
3
Display
Description
L
Left hand part
R
Right hand part
P
Pedal part
ON
Plays part
OFF
Cancels part
G
Plays part with guide (only for SmartKey song)
---
No plays on part
To replay the cancelled part, press [PART SELECT L] or
[PART SELECT R] again so that “ON” appears on the screen.
=Piano Part=
L/R
L=ON R=ON P=ON
Press [BACK] to return to the song playback screen.
30
Note:
For the SmartKey song, “ON”,
“OFF” and “G” appear sequentially
each time you press [PART
SELECT L] or [PART SELECT R].
Chapter
Advanced Song Playback
4
■ Cancelling the Pedal Part
1
On the part cancellation screen, press [
=Piano Part=
] to select “P=.”
L/R
L=ON R=OFF P=ON
English
2
Press [–/NO] to cancel a pedal part.
=Piano Part=
L/R
L=ON R=OFF P=OFF
3
To replay the pedal part, press [+/YES] with the cursor is
on “P=.”
L=ON
R=OFF P=ON
Press [BACK] to return to the song playback screen.
Adjusting the Volume Balance among the Keyboard Playing,
Ensemble Sound, and Software Playback
[BALANCE]
Besides adjusting the overall volume, the volume balance among the
different sound sources as described below can be adjustable.
TG:
Adjusts the volume of the ensemble sound reproduced by the
tone generator (TG) of the Disklavier.
Audio:
Adjusts the volume of the accompaniment or standard audio
sound pre-recorded in the software (CDs).
Voice:
Adjusts the volume of the ensemble voice when you play using
the voice function.
)
See Chapter 5 “Advanced Piano
Playing – Playing the Disklavier
with an Ensemble Voice” on
page 43.
31
Chapter
4
Advanced Song Playback
■ Adjusting the TG Balance
1
Press [BALANCE] on the remote control.
The TG balance setting screen appears.
=BALANCE=
TG BALANCE 100
2
-+
Press [+/YES] and [–/NO] to adjust the volume of the tone
generator.
Note:
You can also use the dial on the
control unit to adjust the volume.
Tone generator volume can be adjusted in a range of 10 to 127.
■ Adjusting the Audio Balance
1
Press [BALANCE] twice on the remote control.
The audio balance setting screen appears.
=BALANCE=
×2
2
-+
AUDIO BALANCE 100
Press [+/YES] and [–/NO] to adjust the volume of the
audio.
Audio volume can be adjusted in a range of 10 to 127.
32
Note:
You can also use the dial on the
control unit to adjust the volume.
Chapter
Advanced Song Playback
4
■ Adjusting the Voice Balance
1
Press [BALANCE] three times on the remote control.
The voice balance setting screen appears.
=BALANCE=
Press [+/YES] and [–/NO] to adjust the volume of the voice.
English
2
-+
VOICE BALANCE 100
×3
Note:
You can also use the dial on the
control unit to adjust the volume.
Voice volume can be adjusted in a range of 0 to 127.
Adjusting the Pitch of Audio
During playback
[FUNC.]
You can temporarily adjust the pitch of the song contains audio
(PianoSoft·PlusAudio, SmartPianoSoft) or an audio CD for your listening
pleasure.
Pitch adjustments are effective until another medium or album is selected,
recording is started, or the Disklavier is turned off.
1
Note:
This function cannot be used to
adjust the pitch of external audio
CDs connected to the OMNI IN
jacks.
During the song playback, press [FUNC.] on the remote
control.
The audio pitch setting screen appears.
=CD=
-+ENT
AudioPitch=+00cent
2
Press [+/YES] and [–/NO] to change the audio pitch.
=CD=
-+ENT
AudioPitch=+01cent
Audio pitch can be adjusted in a range of –50 cent to +50 cent.
33
Chapter
4
Advanced Song Playback
Adjusting the L/R Balance of Audio
During playback
[FUNC.]
You can temporarily adjust the L/R balance of an audio CD.
Balance adjustments are effective until another song is selected, recording
is started, or the Disklavier is turned off.
1
During the song playback, press [FUNC.] several times.
The audio pan setting screen appears.
=CD=
-+ENT
AudioPan=Center
2
Press [+/YES] and [–/NO] to change the audio pan.
=CD=
-+ENT
AudioPan=Left
The following pan settings are available:
Option
Description
Left
Audio of the L channel is output to both of the L and R
channels.
Center
Audio of the L channel is output to the L channel, and the
R channel is output to the R channel.
Right
Audio of the R channel is output to both of the L and R
channels.
Using Timer Play
[SETUP]
“TimerPlay”
You can program your Disklavier to start or stop playback of a song at
various specified times. All you need to do is register up to a maximum of
99 timer settings, and your Disklavier will perform them unattended. This
function is called “timer play.”
Important:
The control unit must be turned on
in advance in order for the timer
play to function. The timer play
cannot turn on/off the control unit.
Note:
Prolonged playback may cause your
piano to overheat. Insert sufficient
breaks between continuous song
playback.
34
Chapter
Advanced Song Playback
4
■ Setting the Timer Play
1
Press [SETUP] on the remote control.
The setup menu screen appears.
2
Select “TimerPlay” with the cursor buttons ([
[ ]), then press [ENTER].
English
(1/2)]
=SETUP MENU=
*TimerPlay *AudioI/O
*MIDI
*M-Tune
][
][
]
(1/2)]
=SETUP MENU=
*TimerPlay *AudioI/O
*MIDI
*M-Tune
The timer play setting screen appears.
Timer
switch
}] {
Program Time Function Album
number
selection
List of the parameters
Item
Option
Description
Timer
switch
ON, OFF
Enables or disables the timer play function.
Program
number
01 - 99
Indicates the number of a program.
Time
##:##
No set.
00:00 23:59
Indicates the time at which a function is to be
performed.
----
No set.
PLAY
Plays back songs at the specific time.
STOP
Stops the timer play.
-----
Plays back the current selected song.
Mem01 Mem99
Indicates the album number in the memory disk.
Lst01 Lst99
Indicates the list number in the playlist.
Function
Album
selection
35
Chapter
4
Advanced Song Playback
■ Switching ON and OFF
To switch ON and OFF, press [ ] to move the cursor to
the timer switch, then press [+/YES] and [–/NO].
=TIMER PLAY=
_?]-+
>TimerPlay=ON
01[##:## ---- -----]
■ Moving Program Number
Press [
] and [
] to go to the program number.
The cursor moves to the function parameter.
■ Setting Function
The following describes how to play back the first album in the internal
flash memory at 8:15 AM.
To switch the function parameter, press [ ] and [ ] to
move the cursor to the function parameter, then press
[+/YES] and [–/NO].
=TIMER PLAY=
_?=]-+
>TimerPlay=ON
01[##:## PLAY -----]
“PLAY” and “STOP” change sequentially.
When “PLAY” is selected, the album selection parameter appears.
■ Selecting Album
Press [ ] to move the cursor to the album selection
parameter, then press [+/YES] and [–/NO] to select the
album.
}][{
36
Chapter
Advanced Song Playback
4
■ Setting Time
1
Press [ ] and [ ] to move the cursor to the hour
parameter, then press [+/YES] and [–/NO] to set hours.
2
English
}][{
Press [ ] to move the cursor to the minute parameter,
then press [+/YES] and [–/NO] to set minutes.
}][{
3
Press [Enter] to return to the setup menu.
■ About Song Playback Screen
When the song playback is stopped — with the timer play function is set to
ON and the current time is displayed — “T” flashes to the right side of the
current time.
Indicates that the timer play is on.
37
Chapter
4
Advanced Song Playback
Skipping the Blank Part at the Beginning of a Song
[SETUP]
“Playback”
When there is a blank part created at the beginning of the recorded song,
turning on this function automatically skips the unwanted part and starts
playback from the actual beginning of the song.
1
Press [SETUP] on the remote control.
The setup menu screen appears.
{
2
Select “Playback” with the cursor buttons ([
[ ]), then press [ENTER].
][
][
}
The playback setting screen appears with the cursor flashing.
=Playback=
>SkipSpace=ON
38
-+
3
Press [+/YES] and [–/NO] to switch ON and OFF.
4
Press [ENTER] to return to the setup menu.
]
Chapter
Advanced Song Playback
4
Video Synchronized Playback
You can enjoy piano playback with the video recorded on the DVD
recorder.
1
Perform the video synchronized recording in advance.
Make sure that the OMNI IN setting is set to “AutoDetect”.
3
Turn down the volume completely on the TV if you
connect the audio output of the DVD recorder to the TV.
Turn down the volume completely on the camcorder if you use the
camcorder only.
For details on video synchronized
recording, see Chapter 7 “Advanced
Recording – Video Synchronized
Recording” on page 56.
Note:
Be sure to rewind the video cassette
to locate the beginning of the
recording. It may take some time
before piano playback starts if you
start playback halfway through the
video.
English
2
)
Note:
When using the song copied to the
USB flash memory, it may take
some time until the Disklavier
recognizes the information for
synchronization.
)
4
Start playback on the DVD recorder.
Start playback on the camcorder if you use the camcorder only.
The Disklavier automatically searches and selects the song paired
with the video, and then starts playback as well.
PIANO005.MID
See “Setting for Video
Synchronized Recording” on
page 56.
)
If the piano playing is not
synchronized with the video picture,
adjust the offset time for
synchronization. See Chapter 10
“Enhancing the Disklavier by
Hooking Up Other Devices –
Setting the Disklavier for Audio
Data Reception/Transmission” on
page 101.
)
If noises (synchronized signal) are
heard during video synchronized
playback, turn down the signal level
and re-record. See Chapter 10
“Enhancing the Disklavier by
Hooking Up Other Devices –
Setting the Disklavier for Audio
Data Reception/Transmission” on
page 101.
Note:
You cannot operate the Disklavier
using the control unit or remote
control during video synchronized
playback. If you want to stop
playback of the song, stop playback
on the DVD recorder (or the
camcorder).
39
Chapter
4
Advanced Song Playback
Adding Disklavier Accompaniment to Commercial CD Songs
(PianoSmart™ Playback)
Insert a CD
[PLAY]
You can add a Disklavier piano performance you recorded or on
commercially available SmartPianoSoft software to the playback of songs
on your favorite CDs.
1
Insert a desired CD that you want to synchronize with the
SmartPianoSoft song.
2
Select a desired SmartPianoSoft song.
3
Press [PLAY].
)
To record the piano performance to
add, see Chapter 7 “Advanced
Recording – CD Synchronized
Recording” on page 60.
)
To select a song, see Chapter 3
“Basic Song Playback – Selecting
Medium and Their Contents” on
page 17.
Playback begins with the CD playback.
=Memory=
A01-038
<00:03> My
(SPS)V+00
Favorite
SmartKey™ Playback
Select a SmartKey song
[PLAY]
Special SmartKey software uses all the “SmartKey” features to create an
exciting way in which non-players can learn to play simple melodies, one
note at a time, without the need for written music. SmartKey software does
this by partially depressing the piano key to signal which note should be
played. The Disklavier then waits for you to press this key before it
continues to the next note in the melody (If you miss the movement of the
key, the Disklavier will repeat the movement until you press the key).
When you press the key, the Disklavier will reward you with ear tickling
phrases, incredible harmonies, and lush arpeggios to give you the aural
and visual image of a complete high-quality performance. In short, it
SHOWS you which key to play, WAITS for you to play that key before it
continues, and REWARDS you with music. It is like having an eternally
patient music teacher showing your fingers which notes to play.
1
40
Select a desired SmartKey song.
)
To select a song, see Chapter 3
“Basic Song Playback – Selecting
Medium and Their Contents” on
page 17.
Chapter
Advanced Song Playback
2
4
Press [PLAY].
Playback stops, and the key to play next moves slightly.
English
Key moves slightly
The key to play flashes in the counter.
Pachelbel=s
Flashes
3
Play the key that the keyboard indicates.
This will continue until the song is finished. Notice that the
Disklavier patiently waits for you to play the right key before
proceeding to the next key. Also, notice that if you happen to miss
the cue, it will gently remind you what the key is every few seconds
until you play the right key.
■ Key notation
As a reference, “C3” is middle “C”, which means “C4” is an octave above
middle “C” and so on.
C 2D 2
F 2G 2 A 2
C 3D 3
F 3G 3A 3 C 4
C2 D2 E2 F2 G2 A2 B2 C3 D3 E3 F3 G3 A3 B3 C4
Middle C
41
Chapter
5
Advanced Piano Playing
Playing the Disklavier along with the Internal Metronome
[METRONOME]
The internal metronome helps you playing along the meter (beat) and the
tempo you set.
Also the volume of the metronome can be adjusted.
1
Press [METRONOME] on the remote control.
The metronome setting screen appears and the metronome starts
to click.
=METRONOME=
_]-+
TEMPO=117bpm =4/4
VOLUME=****
2
To change the tempo, press [ ] to move the cursor to the
tempo parameter, then press [+/YES] and [–/NO].
=METRONOME=
_]-+
TEMPO=125bpm =4/4
VOLUME=****
The tempo can be adjusted in a range of 30 bpm to 400 bpm.
3
To change the beat, press [ ] to move the cursor to the
beat parameter, then press [+/YES] and [–/NO].
=METRONOME=
_]-+
TEMPO=125bpm =3/4
VOLUME=****
The following beat setting are available: 1/4, 2/4, 3/4, 4/4, 5/4, 6/4,
7/4, 8/4, 9/4.
4
To change the volume, press [ ] to move the cursor to
the volume parameter, then press [+/YES] and [–/NO].
=METRONOME=
_]-+
TEMPO=125bpm =3/4
VOLUME=***&
The volume can be adjusted in 4 steps.
42
Note:
The tempo parameter displayed on
the metronome setting screen
indicates the number of beats in a
minute, and one beat represents a
quarter. When you play a song
written in different measure unit
from quarter note, change the setting
(e.g.When playing a song in 3/2, set
beat to 6/4).
Chapter
Advanced Piano Playing
5
5
To cancel this function, press [METRONOME] again.
Playing the Disklavier with an Ensemble Voice
The Disklavier’s [VOICE] lets you assign a voice from the internal XG tone
generator to accompany the piano while you play. You will hear in unison
the piano sound coming from the Disklavier and an ensemble voice
produced by the internal XG tone generator. This is sometimes referred to
as voice layering or unison.
)
English
[VOICE]
For details on voice groups and
voices, see Chapter 12 “Internal
Tone Generator Voices” on
page 115.
The internal XG tone generator offers 480 instrumental voices and 11
drum kits for playing the keyboard.
1
Press [VOICE] on the remote control.
The voice selection screen appears.
][
2
Press [+/YES] and [–/NO] to select a voice group.
Changing the voice group displays the top voice of that group in the
voice parameters.
][
3
To change the voice, press [ ] to move the cursor to the
voice parameter, then press [+/YES] and [–/NO].
][ !
If necessary, adjust the volume of the voice in the voice balance
setting screen.
4
To cancel this function, press [VOICE] again.
)
See Chapter 4 “Advanced Song
Playback – Adjusting the Volume
Balance among the Keyboard
Playing, Ensemble Sound, and
Software Playback” on page 31.
Note:
The voice function is cancelled if
you escape from the voice selection
screen by other operations.
43
Chapter
6
Basic Recording
A song that you play on the Disklavier can be recorded and the recorded song can be easily
saved for the selected medium. Furthermore, you can title your new recording for simple
distinguish before recording.
Recording a New Song
[RECORD]
You can save a new song that you play for an album.
1
Select a destination medium and album.
2
Press [RECORD].
The recording standby screen appears, and [RECORD] on the
control unit lights red and [PLAY/PAUSE] flashes in green.
=RECORD=
A01-039
<00:00>
*_ LR 99%
(New Song)
The level appears in the format section as soon as you play a
keyboard or press a pedal.
3
Press [PLAY].
[PLAY/PAUSE] stops flashing.
The Disklavier is now ready for you to play.
4
Start playing your song.
Recording will start as soon as you touch a key. The counter starts
to advance.
=RECORD=
A01-039
<00:01>
*_ LR 99%
(New Song)
5
Press [STOP] when you finish playing your song.
The recorded song is loaded.
44
Note:
Up to 999 songs can be recorded in a
medium.
)
To select a medium and album, see
Chapter 3 “Basic Song Playback –
Selecting Medium and Their
Contents” on page 17.
Chapter
Basic Recording
6
Titling a Song
[RECORD]
[FUNC.]×2
Title a new song before you start recording.
Select a destination medium and album.
2
Press [RECORD].
3
Press [FUNC.] twice in the recording standby screen.
)
To select a medium and album, see
Chapter 3 “Basic Song Playback –
Selecting Medium and Their
Contents” on page 17.
English
1
The song title editing screen appears.
×2
=RECORD=
[A-Z]
4
Use [
5
Select characters with [+/YES] and [–/NO] or the keyboard.
] and [
] to move the cursor.
=RECORD=
Chopin
[a-z]
You can enter up to 64 characters.
6
)
For details on characters, see
“Available Characters” on next
page.
)
To enter characters using the
keyboard, see “Keyboard Character
Map” on next page.
Note:
You can enter space by pressing
[+/YES] and [–/NO]
simultaneously.
Press [PLAY] after title determined.
Recording begins.
45
Chapter
6
Basic Recording
Available Characters
The following table shows which characters are available. You can switch the character types by the yellow
button on the remote control.
Character Type
Characters
Letters
(Upper Case)
[A-Z]
Space
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
Space
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
k
l
n
o
p
q
r
s
t
u
v
w
x
y
z
Space
!
”
#
$
%
&
’
(
)
*
+
,
-
.
/
:
;
<
=
>
?
_
@
Space
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
M
Letters
(Lower Case)
[a-z]
m
Symbols
[etc]
Numbers
[0-9]
9
Keyboard Character Map
The Disklavier keyboard can also be used to enter characters when titling albums and songs.
Note: Not all characters that the Disklavier provides are available from the keyboard. Certain punctuation must be input from the remote
control. See the character table above.
Cursor
back
Space
Numbers
1
1
2
3
4
5 6 7
8
2
3 4
5
6
7 8
9
0
–
·
a bc d e f
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45
Upper case/
Lower case
Letters
f g h i j k l m n o p q
Cursor
forward
r s t u v w x y z
11 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88
Pedal Functions
Soft/Shift Pedal:
Switches character types.
46
Damper Pedal:
Moves the cursor forward.
Chapter
7
Advanced Recording
This chapter describes further functions for the advanced piano recording such as playing and
measuring the current playing song tempo with the metronome, recording the left-hand part
and the right-hand part separately.
Recording with the Internal Metronome
[METRONOME]
[RECORD]
Songs recorded with the metronome will be in the measures and beats
format.
All metronome parameters are reset when the Disklavier is switched off.
1
Press [METRONOME] on the remote control.
Note:
The tempo parameter displayed on
the metronome setting screen
indicates the number of beats in a
minute, and one beat represents a
quarter. When you play a song
written in different measure unit
from quarter note, change the setting
(e.g. When playing a song in 3/2, set
beat to 6/4).
English
You can use the metronome to record songs.
The metronome setting screen appears.
=METRONOME=
}{-+
TEMPO=117bpm $=4/4
VOLUME=HHHH
2
To change the tempo, press [ ] to move the cursor to the
tempo parameter, then press [+/YES] and [–/NO].
=METRONOME=
_]-+
TEMPO=125bpm =4/4
VOLUME=****
The tempo can be adjusted in a range of 30 bpm to 400 bpm.
3
To change the beat, press [ ] to move the cursor to the
beat parameter, then press [+/YES] and [–/NO].
=METRONOME=
_]-+
TEMPO=125bpm =3/4
VOLUME=****
The following beat setting are available: 1/4, 2/4, 3/4, 4/4, 5/4, 6/4,
7/4, 8/4, 9/4.
47
Chapter
7
Advanced Recording
4
To change the volume, press [ ] to move the cursor to
the volume parameter, then press [+/YES] and [–/NO].
=METRONOME=
_]-+
TEMPO=125bpm =3/4
VOLUME=***&
The volume can be adjusted in 4 steps.
5
Press [RECORD] in the metronome setting screen.
The metronome recording setting screen appears.
=RECORD=
}{-+
TEMPO=125bpm $=3/4
VOLUME=HHHD
6
Press [PLAY]
Recording begins immediately.
[PLAY/PAUSE], [REC] and [SELECT] on the control unit flash
simultaneously at the first beat of the metronome.
7
Start playing your song.
8
Press [STOP] when you finish playing your song.
The recorded song is loaded.
48
Chapter
Advanced Recording
7
Recording the Left and Right Parts Separately
[RECORD]
[FUNC.]
When recording an L/R song, the left- and right-hand parts can be
recorded separately. Either part can be recorded first, and the pedals can
be recorded with the first part.
English
While you record the second part, the first part will play back for
monitoring.
If the left-hand or right-hand part is difficult to play at normal speed, the first
part can be recorded at a slow tempo, and then the tempo changed
afterwards to record the second part at the normal song speed.
This section describes how to record the left-hand part first then the
right-hand part second.
■ Recording the Left-Hand Part
1
Select a destination medium and album.
2
Press [RECORD].
3
)
To select a medium and album, see
Chapter 3 “Basic Song Playback –
Selecting Medium and Their
Contents” on page 17.
)
Press [FUNC.] in the recording standby screen.
The part selection screen appears.
In the case you want to title your
new song before recording, see
Chapter 6 “Basic Recording –
Titling a Song” on page 45, to
rename the title after recording, see
Chapter 8 “Media Management –
Renaming a Song” on page 71.
)
=RECORD=
L=REC R=OFF
4
LR
If you want to record your L/R song
using the metronome, see Chapter 7
“Advanced Recording – Recording
with the Internal Metronome” on
page 47.
Make sure that the left-hand part is set to be recorded
(“L=REC”), then press [PLAY].
This Disklavier is now ready for you to play the left-hand part.
5
Start playing your song.
Recording will start as soon as you touch a key.
6
Press [STOP] when you finish playing your song.
The L/R song with the left-hand part recorded is saved onto the
selected album.
49
Chapter
7
Advanced Recording
■ Recording the Right-Hand Part
1
Press [RECORD].
2
Press [ ] and [ ] to select the L/R song with the lefthand part that you have just recorded, then press
[ENTER].
3
Press [FUNC.] in the recording standby screen.
The part selection screen appears.
=RECORD=
LR
L=PLY R=OFF
The part that has already been recorded is displayed as “L=PLY.”
4
Press [PART SELECT R] to record the right-hand part.
=RECORD=
LR
L=PLY R=REC
The part set to “REC” will be recorded.
5
Press [PLAY].
Playback of the left-hand recorded part starts immediately, so be
sure that you are ready to play the right-hand part along with it.
50
Chapter
Advanced Recording
6
7
Press [STOP] when you finish playing your song.
The following screen appears.
=RECORD=
_]ENT
Save to Disk?
*SAVE *NEW *CANCEL
Option
Description
SAVE
The second part is saved with the first part under the
current song number.
NEW
The second part is saved under a new song number.
The first part is kept under the previous song number.
English
The following table gives a description of each of the options.
CANCEL The second part is discarded. The first part is kept
under the previous song number.
7
Press [ ] and [
[ENTER].
] to select an option, then press
The right-hand part is saved as indicated or canceled.
Recording the Left and Right Parts Together (Setting a Split Point)
[RECORD]
[FUNC.]
You can also record an L/R song by playing the left- and right-hand parts
simultaneously. In this case, a keyboard split point is set, and the notes
played on the left-hand side of the split point are saved as the left-hand
part, and notes played on the right-hand side of the split point are saved as
the right-hand part.
1
Select a destination medium and album.
2
Press [RECORD].
3
)
To select a medium or album, see
Chapter 3 “Basic Song Playback –
Selecting Medium and Their
Contents” on page 17.
)
Press [FUNC.] in the recording standby screen.
The part selection screen appears.
In the case you want to title your
new song before recording, see
Chapter 6 “Basic Recording –
Titling a Song” on page 45, to
rename the title after recording, see
Chapter 8 “Media Management –
Renaming a Song” on page 71.
)
=RECORD=
L=REC R=OFF
LR
If you want to record your L/R song
using the metronome, see Chapter 7
“Advanced Recording – Recording
with the Internal Metronome” on
page 47.
51
Chapter
7
Advanced Recording
4
Press [PART SELECT R] to set both parts to record.
The split point setting screen appears.
=RECORD=
-+
LR=REC SPLIT=C3
The above display shows that the default keyboard split point is
note C3, or middle C. In this case, note C3 and notes below are
saved as the left-hand part and notes above C3 are saved as the
right-hand part, as shown in the following figure.
C3
Left-hand part
5
Right-hand part
To change the split point, press a key on the keyboard or
[+/YES] and [–/NO] to select a different key.
or
The split point can be set from note A-1 to note C7.
6
Press [PLAY].
The Disklavier is now ready for you to play.
7
Starts playing your song with the left- and right-hand parts
and the pedal part simultaneously.
Recording will start as soon as you touch a key.
8
Press [STOP] when you finish playing your song.
The recorded song is loaded.
52
Chapter
Advanced Recording
7
Re-Recording One Part
[RECORD]
Select the L/R song
[PART SELECT L] or [PART SELECT R]
You can re-record the only one part left-hand or the right-hand of the
existing L/R song.
Select a desired medium and album.
2
Press [RECORD].
3
Press [ ] and [ ] to select the L/R song that you want to
re-record, then press [ENTER].
4
Press [PART SELECT L] or [PART SELECT R] to select the
part to re-record.
)
To select a medium and album, see
Chapter 3 “Basic Song Playback –
Selecting Medium and Their
Contents” on page 17.
English
1
The part set to “REC” will be re-recorded.
5
Press [PLAY].
Recording will start immediately, so be sure that you are ready to
play the part.
6
Press [STOP] when you finish playing your song.
The following screen appears.
=RECORD=
_]ENT
Save to Disk?
*SAVE *NEW *CANCEL
53
Chapter
7
Advanced Recording
The following table gives a description of each of the options.
Option
Description
SAVE
The re-recorded part is saved with the other existing
part under the current song number.
NEW
The re-recorded part is saved under a new song
number. The existing parts are kept under the current
song number.
CANCEL The re-recorded part is discarded. The existing parts
are kept under the current song number.
7
Press [ ] and [
[ENTER].
] to select an option, then press
The re-recorded part is saved as indicated or canceled.
Changing the Default Tempo
[RECORD]
Select the song
[FUNC.]×3
This function allows you to change the default tempo of a song and save
the change. It should not be confused with the playback tempo function
described in Chapter 4 “Advanced Song Playback – Changing the
Playback Tempo” in which tempo changes are lost when the Disklavier is
turned off.
The tempo of a song can be changed many times. This function can be
used when recording a very complex song that is difficult to play at a fast
tempo. First, record the song at a tempo you can manage, then change the
tempo afterwards. For example, you could record a difficult left-hand part
at a slow tempo, use this function to change the tempo, then record the
right-hand part at the normal tempo.
If a song’s time format is minutes and seconds, tempo changes are
specified as a percentage of the original tempo.
If a song’s time format is measures and beats, tempo changes are
specified in beats per minute.
54
1
Select a desired medium and album.
2
Press [RECORD].
)
To select a medium or album, see
Chapter 3 “Basic Song Playback –
Selecting Medium and Their
Contents” on page 17.
Chapter
Advanced Recording
Press [ ] and [ ] to select the song in which you want
to change the tempo, then press [ENTER].
4
Press [FUNC.] three times.
English
3
7
×3
For measures and beats, the current song tempo (bpm) is shown.
=RECORD=
_]-+
TEMPO=117bpm =4/4
VOLUME=****
For minutes and seconds, the current song tempo is shown as
“000%.”
=RECORD=
TEMPO=+000%
5
-+
Press [+/YES] and [–/NO] to change the tempo.
[+/YES] increases the tempo, and [–/NO] decreases the tempo.
For measure and beats, the tempo range is from 30 bpm to 400
bpm.
For minutes and seconds, the tempo range is from –75% to
+242%.
6
Press [STOP] to save the tempo change.
The following screen appears.
=RECORD=
_]ENT
Save to Disk?
*SAVE *NEW *CANCEL
The following table gives a description of each of the options.
Option
Description
SAVE
The song is saved at its new tempo under the current
song title.
NEW
The song is saved at its new tempo under a new song
number. The original song is kept under the previous
song number.
CANCEL The song with a new tempo is discarded. The original
song is kept under the previous song number.
55
Chapter
7
Advanced Recording
7
Press [
] and [
] to select an option, then press [ENTER].
To change the tempo again or to reset the original tempo, repeat
steps 1 to 6.
Video Synchronized Recording
[SETUP]
Connect a camcorder and a DVD recorder
By recording a song played on the Disklavier synchronized with the video
recording, later on, you can enjoy piano playback with the video. First set
up the camcorder, the DVD recorder, and the Disklavier, and then start
recording by following the procedures below.
■ Setting for Video Synchronized Recording
1
Press [SETUP] on the remote control.
The setup menu screen appears.
{
2
Select “AudioI/O” with the cursor buttons ([
[ ]), then press [ENTER].
{
The audio I/O setting screen appears.
] 56
][
][
]
)
For details on video synchronized
playback, see Chapter 4 “Advanced
Song Playback – Video
Synchronized Playback” on page 39.
Chapter
Advanced Recording
3
7
Select “OMNI IN” with the cursor buttons ([ ] [ ]), then
press [+/YES] and [–/NO] to change setting to “Auto
Detect”.
] English
4
Select “OMNI OUT” with the cursor buttons ([ ] [
then press [+/YES] and [–/NO] to change setting to
“SYNC”.
]),
][
5
Press [ENTER] to complete the operation.
6
Connect a camcorder and a DVD recorder to the control
unit.
Camcorder
(for shooting)
DVD recorder
(for recording and playback)
TV
(for displaying)
To A/V
output
Video
connector
(yellow)
To video
input
A/V cord
(supplied with the
camcorder)
RCA cord
(not supplied)
Note:
Confirm the shape of input/output
connectors on the camcorder and the
DVD recorder, and prepare the
cables fit to them.
To video
input
To
video
output
To
audio
input
To
audio
output
Video cord
(not supplied)
RCA cord
(not supplied)
Control unit
57
Chapter
7
Advanced Recording
■ Starting Video Synchronized Recording
1
Select a destination medium and album.
2
Press [RECORD].
)
To select a medium and album, see
Chapter 3 “Basic Song Playback –
Selecting Medium and Their
Contents” on page 17.
The video synchronized recording standby screen appears, and
[RECORD] on the control unit lights red, and [PLAY/PAUSE]
flashed in green.
(New Song)
3
Set the camcorder to video shooting mode.
4
Select the video input on the DVD recorder which the
camcorder is connected to, then start recording on the
DVD recorder.
5
Press [PLAY].
[PLAY/PAUSE] stops flashing, and the counter starts to advance.
(New Song)
58
6
Wait for approximately ten seconds, and then start playing
your song.
7
Press [STOP] when you finish playing your song.
8
Stop recording on the DVD recorder.
Note:
This step is necessary for
synchronization of the song and the
video playback, and should not be
omitted.
Chapter
Advanced Recording
7
■ Using the Camcorder only
If your camcorder has both mic input and audio output, you can
perform video synchronized recording using the camcorder only.
1. Set the Disklavier following the procedures 1 to 5 on page 56.
2. Connect a camcorder to the control unit.
English
Camcorder
To mic/line
input
RCA cord with
resistance
(not supplied)
To audio
output
RCA cord
(not supplied)
Control unit
3. Select a destination medium and album.
4. Press [RECORD].
5. Start recording on the camcorder.
6. Press [PLAY].
7. Wait for approximately ten seconds, and then start playing your
song.
8. Press [STOP] when you finish playing your song.
9. Stop recording on the camcorder.
59
Chapter
7
Advanced Recording
CD Synchronized Recording
Insert an audio CD
[RECORD]
You can record a Disklavier piano performance along with the playback of
songs on commercial CDs.
1
Select a destination medium and album, then song in the
selected album.
2
Insert an audio CD and select the song that you want to
synchronize with.
3
Press [RECORD].
)
To select a medium and album, see
Chapter 3 “Basic Song Playback –
Selecting Medium and Their
Contents” on page 17.
The SPS recording standby screen appears, and [RECORD] on the
control unit lights red, and [PLAY/PAUSE] flashes in green.
=RECORD=(SPS)
A01-038
<00:00>
LR 99%
(New Song)
4
Select the desired part of a song, then press [PLAY] to
start synchronizing.
Recording begins with the CD playback.
5
Start playing the Disklavier along with the CD playback.
6
Press [STOP] to stop recording.
The recorded song is loaded.
60
)
To play back the performance
recorded with this feature, see
Chapter 4 “Advanced Song
Playback – Adding Disklavier
Accompaniment to Commercial CD
Songs (PianoSmart™ Playback)” on
page 40.
Chapter
8
Media Management
This chapter describes how to manage contents inside the media, such as managing albums,
songs and playlists.
Managing Albums
Album selection screen
[FUNC.]
1
Press [FUNC.] in the album selection screen.
)
To select a album, see Chapter 3
“Basic Song Playback – Selecting
Medium and Their Contents” on
page 17.
English
You can use the album function menu for creating, deleting and copying
albums inside a medium.
The album function menu screen appears.
(1/2)]
=ALBUM MENU=
*CopyAlbum *DeleteAlbum
*NewAlbum *RenameAlbum
2
Select a desired function with the cursor buttons ([
[ ] [ ] [ ]), then press [ENTER].
]
Note:
Available functions vary depending
on the medium you selected.
)
About playlists, see Chapter 8
“Media Management – Managing
Playlists” on page 76.
The following functions are available:
- CopyAlbum
- DeleteAlbum
- NewAlbum
- RenameAlbum
- SortAlbum
- AddToPList
- DeleteList
- NewList
- RenameList
Making Copies of Albums
Album selection screen
[FUNC.]
“CopyAlbum”
You can make copies of the album to the different medium.
This function is available for albums on [Memory], [CD](CD-ROM), [USB1],
[USB2] and [FromToPC].
Note:
Up to 99 albums can be saved in a
medium.
61
Chapter
8
Media Management
1
Select “CopyAlbum” in the album function menu, then
press [ENTER].
(1/2)]
=ALBUM MENU=
*CopyAlbum *DeleteAlbum
*NewAlbum *RenameAlbum
The CopyAlbum screen appears.
{ 2
Select a destination medium with [+/YES] and [–/NO].
{
3a To copy to the new album, press [ENTER].
“OK?” flashes in the first line of the screen.
!"
{
3b To add to the existing album, press [
] to move the
cursor to the album, and press [+/YES] and [–/NO] to
select the album, then press [ENTER].
{
“OK?” flashes in the first line of the screen.
{
62
Chapter
Media Management
4
8
Press [+/YES] to make a copy, [–/NO] to cancel.
=CopyAlbum=
Executing...
=CopyAlbum=
Completed.
Press any button.
ANY
English
After a while, the completion message appears.
Press any button to return to the album selection screen.
Deleting Albums
Album selection screen
[FUNC.]
“DeleteAlbum”
You can delete the albums.
This function is available for albums on [Memory], [USB1], [USB2] and
[FromToPC].
1
Select “DeleteAlbum” in the album function menu, then
press [ENTER].
(1/2)]
=ALBUM MENU=
*CopyAlbum *DeleteAlbum
*NewAlbum *RenameAlbum
The DeleteAlbum screen appears.
2
Press [ENTER].
“OK?” flashes in the first line of the screen.
3
Press [+/YES] to delete the album, [–/NO] to cancel.
=DeleteAlbum=
Executing...
=DeleteAlbum=
Completed.
Press any button.
ANY
After a while, the completion message appears.
Press any button to return to the album selection screen.
63
Chapter
8
Media Management
Creating a New Album
Album selection screen
[FUNC.]
“NewAlbum”
You can create a new album into the selected medium.
This function is available for albums on [Memory], [USB1] and [USB2].
1
Select the “NewAlbum” in the album function menu, then
press [ENTER].
Note:
Up to 99 albums can be created in a
medium.
Note:
If you enter the same title as the
album already exists, the new album
is titled in the form of “album title
xx” (“xx” indicates the number).
(1/2)]
=ALBUM MENU=
*CopyAlbum *DeleteAlbum
*NewAlbum *RenameAlbum
The NewAlbum screen appears.
ENT
=NewAlbum=
03:(no title)
2
Press [ENTER].
The album title editing screen appears.
=NewAlbum=
3
Use [
4
Select characters with [+/YES] and [–/NO] or the keyboard.
] and [
=NewAlbum=
Pops
] to move the cursor.
[a-z]
You can enter up to 64 characters.
64
[A-Z]
)
For details on characters, see
“Available Characters” on page 46.
)
To enter characters using the
keyboard, see “Keyboard Character
Map” on page 46.
Chapter
Media Management
5
8
Press [ENTER].
“OK?” flashes in the first line of the screen.
English
6
Press [+/YES] to create a new album, [–/NO] to cancel.
=NewAlbum=
Executing...
=NewAlbum=
Completed.
Press any button.
ANY
After a while, the completion message appears.
Press any button to return to the album selection screen.
Renaming an Album
Album selection screen
[FUNC.]
“RenameAlbum”
You can rename the albums which already named.
This function is available only for albums on [Memory].
1
Select “RenameAlbum” in the album function menu, then
press [ENTER].
(1/2)]
=ALBUM MENU=
*CopyAlbum *DeleteAlbum
*NewAlbum *RenameAlbum
The RenameAlbum screen appears.
2
Press [ENTER].
The album title editing screen appears.
=RenameAlbum=
Pops Selection
[A-Z]
65
Chapter
8
Media Management
3
Use [
4
Select characters with [+/YES] and [–/NO] or the keyboard.
] and [
] to move the cursor.
=RenameAlbum=
Jazz Selection
[a-z]
To enter characters using the
keyboard, see “Keyboard Character
Map” on page 46.
Press [ENTER].
“OK?” flashes in the first line of the screen.
6
Press [+/YES] to rename, [–/NO] to cancel.
=RenameAlbum=
Executing...
=RenameAlbum=
Completed.
Press any button.
After a while, the completion message appears.
Press any button to return the album selection screen.
66
For details on characters, see
“Available Characters” on page 46.
)
You can enter up to 64 characters.
5
)
ANY
Chapter
Media Management
8
Rearranging the Order of Albums
Album selection screen
[FUNC.]
“SortAlbum”
You can rearrange the order of albums that you selected.
This function is available only for albums on [Memory].
Select “SortAlbum” in the album function menu, then
press [ENTER].
English
1
}
The SortAlbum screen appears.
=SortAlbum=
?=ENT
06:Favorite Latin Select
07:Free Flight
2
Press [ ] and [
position.
] to move the albums to the desired
=SortAlbum=
?=ENT
06:Favorite Latin Select
07:Free Flight
3
=SortAlbum=
?=ENT
07:Free Flight
06:Favorite Latin Select
Press [ENTER].
“OK?” flashes in the first line of the screen.
=SortAlbum= OK? YES/NO
08:Mike Garson Trio-Live
06:Favorite Latin Select
4
Press [+/YES] to rearrange, [–/NO] to cancel.
=SortAlbum=
Executing...
=SortAlbum=
Completed.
Press any button.
ANY
After a while, the completion message appears.
Press any button to return to the album selection screen.
67
Chapter
8
Media Management
Managing Songs
Song selection screen
[FUNC.]
You can use the song function menu for managing the copy or the deletion
songs inside the album.
1
Press [FUNC.] in the song selection screen.
)
To select the song, see Chapter 3
“Basic Song Playback – Selecting
Medium and Their Contents” on
page 17.
The song function menu screen appears.
(1/2)]
=SONG MENU=
*CopySong *DeleteSong
*RenameSong *SortSong
2
Select a desired function with the cursor buttons ([
[ ] [ ] [ ]), then press [ENTER].
]
Note:
Available functions vary depending
on the medium you selected.
Note:
If there is no available function or
no song, the song function menu
screen does not appear although
pressing [FUNC.].
)
The following functions are available:
- CopySong
- DeleteSong
- RenameSong
- SortSong
- AddToPList
- ConvertSong
- Counter
- Strip XP
About playlists, see Chapter 8
“Media Management – Managing
Playlists” on page 76.
Making Copies of Songs
Song selection screen
[FUNC.]
“CopySong”
You can copy songs stored on an album to another.
This function is available for song in the album on [Memory], [CD](CDROM), [USB1], [USB2] and [FromToPC].
Note:
Copy-protected songs, such as
PianoSoft songs, cannot be copied to
a removable medium.
Note:
Up to 999 songs can be saved in an
album.
68
Chapter
Media Management
1
8
Select “CopySong” in the song function menu, then press
[ENTER].
(1/2)]
=SONG MENU=
*CopySong *DeleteSong
*RenameSong *SortSong
The CopySong screen appears.
English
}{
a
{
2
Select a destination medium with [+/YES] and [–/NO].
=CopySong=
001:MoaArt
{USB1
>01:/
3
}{-+ENT
Press [ ] to move the cursor to the album, and press
[+/YES] and [–/NO] to select a destination album.
}{-+ENT
=CopySong=
001:MoaArt
{USB1
>02:/MyFolder
4
Press [ENTER].
“OK?” flashes in the first line of the screen.
a
{
5
Press [+/YES] to make a copy, [–/NO] to cancel.
=CopySong=
Executing...
=CopySong=
Completed.
Press any button.
ANY
After a while, the completion message appears.
Press any button to return to the song selection screen.
69
Chapter
8
Media Management
Deleting Songs
Song selection screen
[FUNC.]
“DeleteSong”
You can delete songs stored on an album.
This function is available for songs in the album on [Memory], [USB1],
[USB2], [Playlist] and [FromToPC].
1
Select “DeleteSong” in the song function menu, then
press [ENTER].
(1/2)]
=SONG MENU=
*CopySong *DeleteSong
*RenameSong *SortSong
The DeleteSong screen appears.
ENT
=DeleteSong=
001:Mo=Art
2
Press [ENTER].
“OK?” flashes in the first line of the screen.
=
3
Press [+/YES] to delete the song, [–/NO] to cancel.
=DeleteSong=
Executing...
=DeleteSong=
Completed.
Press any button.
After a while, the completion message appears.
Press any button to return to the song selection screen.
70
ANY
Chapter
Media Management
8
Renaming a Song
Song selection screen
[FUNC.]
“RenameSong”
You can rename the songs which already named.
This function is available for songs in the album on [Memory], [USB1],
[USB2] and [FromToPC].
English
1
Select “RenameSong” in the song function menu, then
press [ENTER].
(1/2)]
=SONG MENU=
*CopySong *DeleteSong
*RenameSong *SortSong
The RenameSong screen appears.
ENT
=RenameSong=
006:Toccata
2
Press [ENTER].
The song title editing screen appears.
=RenameSong=
Toccata
[A-Z]
3
Use [
4
Select characters with [+/YES] and [–/NO] or the keyboard.
] and [
] to move the cursor.
)
For details on characters, see
“Available Characters” on page 46.
)
To enter characters using the
keyboard, see “Keyboard Character
Map” on page 46.
You can enter up to 64 characters.
71
Chapter
8
Media Management
5
Press [ENTER].
“OK?” flashes in the first line of the screen.
=RenameSong= OK? YES/NO
006:Toccata and Fugue
6
Press [+/YES] to rename, [–/NO] to cancel.
=RenameSong=
Executing...
=RenameSong=
Completed.
Press any button.
ANY
After a while, the completion message appears.
Press any button to return to the song selection screen.
Rearranging the Order of Songs
Song selection screen
[FUNC.]
“SortSong”
You can rearrange the order of songs in an album.
This function is available only for songs in the album on [Memory] and
[Playlist].
1
Select “SortSong” in the song function menu, then press
[ENTER].
(1/2)]
=SONG MENU=
*CopySong *DeleteSong
*RenameSong *SortSong
The SortSong screen appears.
=SortSong=
?=ENT
006:Toccata and Fugue
007:Admiration
2
Press [ ] and [
position.
] to move the songs to the desired
=SortSong=
?=ENT
006:Toccata and Fugue
007:Admiration
72
=SortSong=
?=ENT
007:Admiration
006:Toccata and Fugue
Chapter
Media Management
3
8
Press [ENTER].
“OK?” flashes in the first line of the screen.
=SortSong= OK? YES/NO
008:Interaction
006:Toccata and Fugue
English
4
Press [+/YES] to rearrange, [–/NO] to cancel.
=SortSong=
Executing...
=SortSong=
Completed.
Press any button.
ANY
After a while, the completion message appears.
Press any button to return to the song selection screen.
Converting Song Format
Song selection screen
[FUNC.]
“ConvertSong”
The song format can be converted to other format.
This function is available for songs in the album on [Memory], [USB1],
[USB2] and [FromToPC].
1
Note:
The converted song will be newly
added to the end of the album.
Select “ConvertSong” in the song function menu, then
press [ENTER].
}
The ConvertSong screen appears.
-+ENT
=ConvertSong=
001:Song For Students
SMF0
]E-SEQ
73
Chapter
8
Media Management
2
Press [+/YES] and [–/NO] to select a song format.
-+ENT
=ConvertSong=
001:Song For Students
SMF0
]Piano1
This following options are available:
3
Option
Song Format
E-SEQ
E-SEQ format
SMF0
SMF (Standard MIDI File) format 0
SMF1
SMF (Standard MIDI File) format 1
Piano1
E-SEQ format to play on all Disklavier in correct tempo
Press [ENTER].
“OK?” flashes in the first line of the screen.
=ConvertSong=OK? YES/NO
001:Song For Students
SMF0
]Piano1
4
Press [+/YES] to convert, [–/NO] to cancel.
=ConvertSong=
Executing...
=ConvertSong=
Completed.
Press any button.
ANY
After a while, the completion message appears.
Press any button to return to the song selection screen.
Changing the Counter Display
Song selection screen
[FUNC.]
“Counter”
The counter display of a song can be changed from “measures and
beats”(metronome) to “minutes and seconds” or vice versa.
This function is available for songs in the album on [Memory], [USB1],
[USB2] and [FromToPC].
74
Chapter
Media Management
1
8
Select “Counter” in the song function menu, then press
[ENTER].
}
The CounterChange screen appears.
English
ENT
=CounterChange=
001:Song For Students
TIME
]METRONOME
TIME: minutes and seconds display
METRONOME: measures and beats display
2
Press [ENTER].
“OK?” flashes in the first line of the screen.
=CounterChange=OK?YES/NO
001:Song For Students
TIME
]METRONOME
3
Press [+/YES] to change, [–/NO] to cancel.
=CounterChange=
Executing...
=CounterChange=
Completed.
Press any button.
ANY
After a while, the completion message appears.
Press any button to return to the song selection screen.
Converting MIDI Data to a Standard Form (Strip XP)
Song selection screen
[FUNC.]
“Strip XP”
Some Disklavier pianos record highly precise control information (XP
events) that becomes part of the MIDI song files. This data is used to
achieve accurate playback on the Disklavier PRO model, but is not used
when the file is played back on general MIDI devices. When you edit the
song with external MIDI devices (for example a software sequencer), the
relationship between the note data and the XP event as well as the actual
performance may not be maintained. There may be cases in which songs
edited in this manner cannot be played back normally, depending on the
instrument’s settings. In such cases, use the Strip XP function to remove
the XP event to convert the song to standard MIDI format before using it
for playback. Strip XP also makes it possible to reduce the size of MIDI
files when desired.
Note:
Once the XP event is stripped, the
original data cannot be restored.
Before converting valuable music
data, be sure to backup the original
data.
75
Chapter
8
Media Management
1
Select “Strip XP” in the song function menu, then press
[ENTER].
}
The Strip XP screen appears.
2
Press [ENTER].
“OK?” flashes in the first line of the screen.
3
Press [+/YES] to execute, [–/NO] to cancel.
After a while, the completion message appears.
Press any button to return to the song selection screen.
Managing Playlists
By creating lists of your favorite songs, you can program your Disklavier to
automatically play back a series of songs. First create your own playlist by
following the procedures below, then play back that list.
76
Chapter
Media Management
8
Adding Songs/Albums to the Playlist
Album or song selection screen
[FUNC.]
“AddToPList”
This function is available only for songs/albums on [Memory].
Select “AddToPList” in the album or song function menu,
then press [ENTER].
English
1
Note:
Up to 999 songs can be added to a
playlist.
}
The AddToPList screen appears.
{ 2
Select a destination playlist with [+/YES] and [–/NO].
3
Press [ENTER].
“OK?” flashes in the first line of the screen.
{ 4
Press [+/YES] to add, [–/NO] to cancel.
=AddToPList=
Executing...
=AddToPList=
Completed.
Press any button.
ANY
Note:
If “NewPlaylist” is selected in step
2, the title of added album is copied
to that playlist.
After a while, the completion message appears.
Press any button to return to the album or song selection screen.
77
Chapter
8
Media Management
Deleting a Playlist
Album selection screen
[FUNC.]
“DeleteList”
You can delete the playlists which already registered.
1
Select “DeleteList” in the album function menu for the
playlist, then press [ENTER].
(1/1)
=ALBUM MENU=
*DeleteList *NewList
*RenameList
The DeleteList screen appears.
ENT
=DeleteList=
02:My Best Collection
2
Press [ENTER].
“OK?” flashes in the first line of the screen.
=DeleteList= OK? YES/NO
02:My Best Collection
3
Press [+/YES] to delete the playlist, [–/NO] to cancel.
=DeleteList=
Executing...
=DeleteList=
Completed.
Press any button.
ANY
After a while, the completion message appears.
Press any button to return to the album selection screen for the
playlist.
78
Chapter
Media Management
8
Creating a New Playlist
Album selection screen
[FUNC.]
“NewList”
You can create a new playlist for playing back your favorite songs in your
selected order.
Select “NewList” in the album function menu for the
playlist, then press [ENTER].
(1/1)
=ALBUM MENU=
*DeleteList *NewList
*RenameList
Note:
If you enter the same title as the
playlist already exists, the new
playlist is titled in the form of
“playlist title [xx]” (“xx” indicates
the number).
English
1
Note:
Up to 99 playlists can be created.
The NewList screen appears.
ENT
=NewList=
03:(no title)
2
Press [ENTER].
The playlist title editing screen appears.
=NewList=
[A-Z]
3
Use [
4
Select characters with [+/YES] and [–/NO] or the keyboard.
] and [
=NewList=
My Best
] to move the cursor.
[a-z]
You can enter up to 64 characters.
5
)
For details on characters, see
“Available Characters” on page 46.
)
To enter characters using the
keyboard, see “Keyboard Character
Map” on page 46.
Press [ENTER].
“OK?” flashes in the first line of the screen.
=NewList=
OK? YES/NO
03:My Best Collection
79
Chapter
8
Media Management
6
Press [+/YES] to create a new playlist, [–/NO] to cancel.
=NewList=
Executing...
=NewList=
Completed.
Press any button.
ANY
After a while, the completion message appears.
Press any button to return to the album selection screen for the
playlist.
Renaming a Playlist
Album selection screen
[FUNC.]
“RenameList”
You can rename a playlist which already registered.
1
Select “RenameList” in the album function menu for the
playlist, then press [ENTER].
(1/1)
=ALBUM MENU=
*DeleteList *NewList
*RenameList
The RenameList screen appears.
ENT
=RenameList=
My Best Collection
2
Press [ENTER].
The playlist title editing screen appears.
3
80
Use [
] and [
] to move the cursor.
Note:
If you enter the same title as the
playlist already exists, the new
playlist is titled in the form of
“playlist title [xx]” (“xx” indicates
the number).
Chapter
Media Management
4
Select characters with [+/YES] and [–/NO] or the keyboard.
8
)
For details on characters, see
“Available Characters” on page 46.
)
To enter characters using the
keyboard, see “Keyboard Character
Map” on page 46.
You can enter up to 64 characters.
English
5
Press [ENTER].
“OK?” flashes in the first line of the screen.
=RenameList= OK? YES/NO
My Best Hit Collection
6
Press [+/YES] to rename, [–/NO] to cancel.
=RenameList=
Executing...
=RenameList=
Completed.
Press any button.
ANY
After a while, the completion message appears.
Press any button to return to the album selection screen for the
playlist.
Managing Media
Media selection screen
[FUNC.]
You can use the media function menu for copying or deleting entire
contents inside the media.
1
Press [FUNC.] in the media selection screen.
)
To select a media, see Chapter 3
“Basic Song Playback – Selecting
Medium and Their Contents” on
page 17.
The media function menu screen appears.
=MEDIA MENU=
*CopyAll
*DeleteAll
81
Chapter
8
Media Management
2
Select a desired function with the cursor buttons ([
[ ] [ ] [ ]), then press [ENTER].
]
Note:
Available functions vary depending
on the medium you selected.
Note:
If there is no available functions, the
media function menu screen does
not appears although pressing
[FUNC.].
The following functions are available:
- CopyAll
- DeleteAll
- Format
- Refresh
Making Copies of the Entire Contents in a Medium
Media selection screen
[FUNC.]
“CopyAll”
You can copy the entire contents in a medium to the another medium.
)
The function is available for [Memory], [CD](CD-ROM), [USB1], [USB2],
then [FromToPC].
To select a medium, see Chapter 3
“Basic Song Playback – Selecting
Medium and Their Contents” on
page 17.
1
Select “CopyAll” in the media function menu, then press
[ENTER].
=MEDIA MENU=
*CopyAll
*DeleteAll
The CopyAll screen appears.
=CopyAll=
USB1
]Memory
2
Select a destination medium with [+/YES] and [–/NO].
=CopyAll=
USB1
]Memory
82
-+ENT
-+ENT
Note:
Confirm that the destination
medium has enough space to store
the contents.
Chapter
Media Management
3
8
Press [ENTER].
“OK?” flashes in the first line of the screen.
=CopyAll=
OK? YES/NO
USB1
]Memory
English
4
Press [+/YES] to make a copy, [–/NO] to cancel.
=CopyAll=
Completed.
Press any button.
=CopyAll=
Executing...
ANY
Note:
If the maximum number of the
albums in the destination medium
exceeds 99, copying stops.
After a while, the completion message appears.
Press any button to return to the media selection screen.
Deleting the Entire Contents in a Medium
Media selection screen
[FUNC.]
“DeleteAll”
)
You can delete the entire contents in a medium.
This function is available for [Memory], [USB1], [USB2] and [FromToPC].
1
To select a medium, see Chapter 3
“Basic Song Playback – Selecting
Medium and Their Contents” on
page 17.
Select “DeleteAll” in the media function menu, then press
[ENTER].
=MEDIA MENU=
*CopyAll
*DeleteAll
The DeleteAll screen appears.
=DeleteAll=
Media=Memory
2
ENT
Press [ENTER].
“OK?” flashes in the first line of the screen.
=DeleteAll= OK? YES/NO
Media=Memory
83
Chapter
8
Media Management
3
Press [+/YES] to delete, [–/NO] to cancel.
=DeleteAll=
Executing...
=DeleteAll=
Completed.
Press any button.
ANY
After a while, the completion message appears.
Press any button to return to the media selection screen.
Copying Song File from a Personal Computer to the Disklavier
You can copy song files from a Windows or Macintosh computer to a
special folder on the Disklavier called [FromToPC] and then play them on
the Disklavier.
1
Connect the control unit to a LAN (local area network) to
which a personal computer with a song file is also
connected.
Personal computer
Router
LAN
Control unit
84
Note:
Copy-protected files, such as
PianoSoft and PianoSoft·Plus songs,
cannot be copied to the [FromToPC]
folder.
Note:
Do not copy the files other than
Disklavier song files.
Note:
Do not access the [FromToPC]
folder while the Disklavier is
engaged in another operation (such
as file copying or deleting).
Note:
It is necessary to configure the
Disklavier properly for network
communications by enabling it to
get a DHCP IP address
automatically (recommended) or by
assigning an appropriate address
manually. The procedure is the same
as the one used for setting up the
Disklavier for Internet
communications. Please follow the
instructions in Chapter 9 “Internet
Direct Connection (IDC) Service –
Setting the Disklavier for the
Internet Connection” on page 97.
Note:
For information about configuring a
personal computer for network
communications, please refer to the
documentation that came with the
computer.
Chapter
Media Management
8
For Windows
2
On the computer screen, click [Start] and then open the
[My Network Places] window.
3
Open [Dkv******] and confirm that the [FromToPC] folder is
shown under that.
Copy the desired song files to the [FromToPC] folder.
Note:
The folder or icon name differs
depending on the version of your
operating system.
English
4
Note:
[Dkv******] differs depending on
each Disklavier.
)
5
Refresh the contents in the folder.
See Chapter 8 “Media Management
– Refreshing the Contents in
[FromToPC]” on page 87.
■ For Windows: In case that you cannot find
the [Dkv******] icon
1. Press [SETUP] on the remote control.
2. Select “Network” in the setup menu screen.
3. Select “Information” to display the information of network
settings.
4. Press [ ] several times to display “NAME=DKV******” and
memorize that name.
5. Open the [My Network Places] on the computer, and then click
the [Search] icon on the top of the window.
6. Enter the name confirmed in step 4 in the [Computer name] box,
and then click [Search] to start searching.
7. Open [Dkv******] and confirm that the [FromToPC] folder is
shown under that.
8. Copy the desired song files to the [FromToPC] folder.
For Mac OS X 10.3 or later
2
Click the [Finder] icon in the dock, and then click
[Network] icon on the left side of the window.
3
Connect the computer to the Disklavier.
The [Dkv] folder appears on the [Network] window. Open the [Dkv]
folder and click [Dkv******] icon. In the first window that appears,
select [FromToPC] from the mini-menu and click [OK]. Click [OK]
again in the next window that appears. At this point, connection
process completes and the [FromToPC] icon appears on the left
side of the window.
Note:
[Dkv******] differs depending on
each Disklavier.
Note:
If the user ID and password are
required during the process, enter
any name for the ID and leave the
space for the password blank.
85
Chapter
8
Media Management
4
Copy the desired song files to the [FromToPC] folder on
the left side of the finder window.
5
Refresh the contents in the folder.
■ For Macintosh: In case that you cannot find
the [Dkv******] icon
1. Press [SETUP] on the remote control.
2. Select “Network” in the setup menu screen.
3. Select “Information” to display the information of network
settings.
4. Press [ ] several times to display “NAME=DKV******” and
memorize that name.
5. Select [Go] and then [Connect to Server] from the menu bar on
the computer.
6. Enter the name confirmed in step 4 in the address field, and
then click [Connect]. Use syntax “smb://” when entering the
name (“smb://Dkv******”).
7. Select [FromToPC] from the mini-menu in the first window
appears and click [OK]. Click [OK] again in the next window that
appears.
8. Copy the desired song files to the [FromToPC] folder on the left
side of the finder window.
86
)
See Chapter 8 “Media Management
– Refreshing the Contents in
[FromToPC]” on page 87.
Chapter
Media Management
8
Refreshing the Contents in [FromToPC]
Select the [FromToPC]
[FUNC.]
“Refresh”
You must refresh the contents in the [FromToPC] folder after copying song
files from a personal computer, in order to play them on the Disklavier.
Select “Refresh” in the media function menu, then press
[ENTER].
To select a medium, see Chapter 3
“Basic Song Playback – Selecting
Medium and Their Contents” on
page 17.
English
1
)
The Refresh screen appears.
ENT
=Refresh=
Media=FromToPC
2
Press [ENTER].
“OK?” flashes in the first line of the screen.
=Refresh=
OK? YES/NO
Media=FromToPC
3
Press [+/YES] to refresh, [–/NO] to cancel.
=Refresh=
Executing...
=Refresh=
Completed.
Press any button.
ANY
After a while, the completion message appears.
Press any button to return to the media selection screen.
87
Chapter
8
Media Management
Formatting the Floppy Disk (Optional)
Select the floppy disk
[FUNC.]
“Format”
In the case of using the unformatted floppy disk on the floppy drive
(optional) or deleting the entire contents on the floppy disk, format the
floppy disk.
1
Connect the floppy drive (optional) to the USB port on the
control unit.
2
Insert a floppy disk to the floppy drive.
3
Select “Format” in the media function menu, then press
[ENTER].
The Format screen appears.
ENT
=Format=
Media=FD
4
Press [ENTER].
“OK?” flashes in the first line of the screen.
=Format=
Media=FD
5
OK? YES/NO
Press [+/YES] to format, [–/NO] to cancel.
=Format=
Executing...
=Format=
Completed.
Press any button.
After a while, the completion message appears.
Press any button to return to the media selection screen.
88
ANY
Important:
Formatting a floppy disk erases all
data that stored in the disk, so make
sure that the disk you are going to
format does not contain the data you
want to keep.
)
To select a medium, see Chapter 3
“Basic Song Playback – Selecting
Medium and Their Contents” on
page 17.
Note:
If you are formatting a floppy disk,
make sure that the floppy disk’s
erasure protection tab is set to
“unprotected.”
Chapter
Media Management
8
■ Floppy Disk Accidental Erasure Protection
Floppy disks have an erasure protection tab located on the reverse side of
the disk in the bottom right-hand corner. When formatting a disk, make
sure that its erasure protection tab is set to “unprotected.”
Protected
English
When the tab window is open,
formatting and recording are
not possible.
Unprotected
When the tab window is closed,
formatting and recording are
possible.
Making Backups of Songs
[SYSTEM]
“Backup”
You can make a backup copy of the songs and playlists. In order to protect
your valuable music data, Yamaha strongly recommends that you backup
your memory on regular basis.
1
Connect an external USB medium to the USB port on the
control unit.
2
Press [SYSTEM] on the remote control.
Note:
Be sure to use the USB medium
described in Chapter 2 “Getting
Started – Compatible Media Format
for the Removable Media” on
page 14.
Note:
Make sure that the USB medium has
enough space to save the backup
data.
The system menu screen appears.
!"#${
89
Chapter
8
Media Management
3
Select “Backup” with the cursor buttons ([
[ ]), then press [ENTER].
][
][
]
!"#${
The Backup screen appears.
ENT
=Backup=
Make a backup copy to
an external USB medium.
4
Press [ENTER].
“OK?” flashes in the first line of the screen.
=Backup=
OK? YES/NO
Backup song data?
5
Press [+/YES] to make a backup, [–/NO] to cancel.
= =Backup=
Completed.
Press any button.
ANY
After a while, the completion message appears.
Press any button to return to the system menu.
Restoring the Backups
[SYSTEM]
“Restore”
You can restore the current condition of the internal memory to the
previous condition that you made a backup copy.
1
Connect an external USB medium in which you made
backup last time to the USB port on the control unit.
2
Press [SYSTEM] on the remote control.
The system menu screen appears.
!"#${
90
)
To make a backup, see Chapter 8
“Media Management – Making
Backups of Songs” on page 89.
Chapter
Media Management
3
Select “Restore” with the cursor buttons ([
[ ]), then press [ENTER].
][
][
8
]
!"#${
English
The Restore screen appears.
4
Press [ENTER].
“OK?” flashes in the first line of the screen.
=Restore=
OK? YES/NO
Restore this data?
Date:2007-10-22 15:42:00
5
Press [+/YES] to restore, [–/NO] to cancel.
= =Restore=
Completed.
Press any button.
ANY
After a while, the completion message appears.
Press any button to return to the system menu.
91
Chapter
9
Internet Direct Connection (IDC)
Service
What is Internet Direct Connection (IDC)?
Internet Direct Connection (IDC) is a feature that allows you to connect
your Disklavier directly to the Internet. Internet Direct Connection users are
able to listen to a streaming broadcast (DisklavierRadio), and receive
valuable information such as product updates (Network Update). Your
Disklavier can be upgraded remotely as new technologies and services
are developed through the IDC service.
Obtaining an ID and Password for the IDC Service
(IDC Registration)
To use the IDC service, initial registration is required using an Internetconnected computer.
Please register at the following website:
https://music.yamaha.com/serviceRegistration.html
Once you have an IDC account, you will interact with that account using
the remote control. To use the full IDC service, you are required to enter
your registered ID (e-mail address) and password with the remote control
or the keyboard.
Connecting the Disklavier to the Internet
You can connect the Disklavier to a full-time online Internet connection
(ADSL, optical fiber, cable Internet, etc.) via a router or a modem equipped
with a router.
■ Preparations
• To use the Internet connection, you will first need to subscribe to an
Internet service or provider.
• Use a computer to obtain and configure Internet service. You cannot
obtain Internet service or configure router settings on a local area
network using the Disklavier itself.
• Before connecting the LAN cable, make sure to turn off (or shut down)
the Disklavier.
92
Note:
If you have already registered for
the IDC service with any other
instrument (such as the Clavinova),
you do not need to register again.
You can use your ID and password
obtained through that registration.
Note:
Some IDC service functions do not
require an ID and password.
Chapter
Internet Direct Connection (IDC) Service
■ Connecting the Control Unit to the Internet
Connection example 1:
Using a modem with router function
Modem
(with router function)
LAN
cable
Note:
Depending on the contract with your
Internet provider, you may not be
able to connect two or more devices
(for example, a computer and the
Disklavier) to the Internet. Please
check your contract or contact your
Internet provider for further
information.
Note:
Some types of modems (such as
ADSL modems or cable modems)
have multiple ports for connecting
two or more devices (such as
computer, musical instrument, etc.).
If your modems have only one port,
an optional router or hub is required
in order to connect several devices
simultaneously.
English
Other device
(such as computer)
9
Control unit
Connection example 2:
Using a modem without router function
Modem
(without router
function)
Router
Other device
(such as computer)
LAN
cable
Control unit
93
Chapter
9
Internet Direct Connection (IDC) Service
For further information on the Internet connection (only a wired LAN
connection is supported), visit the Yamaha Disklavier website:
http://www.yamaha.com/disklavier/
(for US customers)
http://www.yamaha.ca/content/piano/products/disklavierpianos/
(for Canadian customers)
http://www.yamaha-europe.com/yamaha_europe/english_master/
(for European customers; Check the Disklavier website)
http://www.yamaha.com.au/au/
(for Australian customers; Check the Disklavier website)
■ Notes on Network Security
The Disklavier E3 attempts to achieve a balance between security and
usability in its network implementation. However, a determined hacker may
be able to defeat these security measures and utilize the network of the
purchaser in an unauthorized manner. Since each network is different,
only the purchaser can determine whether the security measures
discussed here will adequately protect their network.
The purchaser acknowledges that connection to the Internet and use of the
Disklavier E3 Internet features is done at the risk of the purchaser. In no
event shall Yamaha, its subsidiaries or Yamaha’s and/or its subsidiaries’
directors, officers, or employees be responsible for unauthorized access,
loss or alteration of the data of the purchaser or be liable for any damage
from intrusions.
Accessing the Internet
[INTERNET]
Once you have established an IDC account and successfully connected
your Disklavier to the Internet, you can access a special Disklavier website
where you can access the DisklavierRadio, and download software
updates.
Note:
Free contents that do not require an
ID and password are available.
D-Radio:
)
Select this to listen to streaming broadcasts of music, with many
channels of music content. You can enjoy listening to piano
performances that play continuously.
MyAccount:
Select this to log in to the IDC service. You can also refer to the
help information from this option.
Update:
Select this to update the Disklavier using Internet connection.
94
Note:
The service contents are subject to
change without prior notice.
See Chapter 3 “Basic Song Playback
– Listening to the DisklavierRadio”
on page 25.
Chapter
Internet Direct Connection (IDC) Service
1
9
Press [INTERNET] on the remote control.
The Internet menu screen appears.
(1/1)
=INTERNET=
*D-Radio
*MyAccount
*Update
English
2
Select a desired menu with the cursor buttons ([
[ ] [ ]), then press [ENTER].
][
]
Perform operations on the screen that appears.
Checking Your Account Information
[INTERNET]
“MyAccount”
You can confirm your current account information of IDC service. You can
also log out from the IDC service.
Login:
Select this to log in to the IDC service. You need to enter your ID
and password.
Note:
ID and password are not required for
free contents (such as free channel
of DisklavierRadio).
Logout:
If you wish to use another IDC account or prevent the current account
from being used by others, select this to log out from the IDC service.
Account Information:
Select this to confirm your account information.
Subscription Status:
Select this to confirm your DisklavierRadio subscription status.
1
Press [INTERNET].
The Internet menu screen appears.
=INTERNET=
*D-Radio
*Update
(1/1)
*MyAccount
95
Chapter
9
Internet Direct Connection (IDC) Service
2
Select “MyAccount” with the cursor buttons ([
[ ] [ ]), then press [ENTER].
][
]
(1/1)
=INTERNET=
*D-Radio
*MyAccount
*Update
The MyAccount screen appears.
]
3
Select a desired option with the cursor buttons ([
then press [ENTER].
][
]),
Perform operations on the screen that appears.
Updating the Disklavier Using the Internet
[INTERNET]
“Update”
You can download and then install update firmware using the IDC service.
1
Press [INTERNET].
The Internet menu screen appears.
(1/1)
=INTERNET=
*D-Radio
*MyAccount
*Update
2
Select “Update” with the cursor buttons ([
[ ]), then press [ENTER].
][
][
(1/1)
=INTERNET=
*D-Radio
*MyAccount
*Update
The update screen appears if there is any updated firmware
available.
=Update=
][ENT
V2.00
{ V2.01
*Download
96
]
Chapter
Internet Direct Connection (IDC) Service
3
9
Following the instructions on the screen, select the option
with the cursor buttons ([ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]), then press
[ENTER].
English
The download process of the firmware starts.
4
Shut down the Disklavier with [ON/OFF] on the control unit
after the download process is completed.
5
Holding [PLAY/PAUSE] on the control unit, press
[ON/OFF].
+
CTRL system V1.00
*UPDATE
(ENT)
Hold
Follow the procedure in Chapter 11 “Other Settings – Updating the
Disklavier” on page 113.
Setting the Disklavier for the Internet Connection
[SETUP]
“Network”
You can change various settings related to the Internet connection. In most
cases, you do not have to change the default factory settings.
Information:
You can confirm the information of network settings.
Use DHCP:
Select the method to determine several addresses. If your router
has DHCP server function, we recommend that you to select
“DHCP” or “DHCP+DNS.”
)
To use the Internet connection,
inquire of your Internet service
provider.
Note:
For information about DNS server
address, IP address, subnet mask
and gateway server address, inquire
of your internet service provider.
DNS1/DNS2:
Enter the address of the primary and secondary DNS server. These
settings must be made when Use DHCP is set to “DHCP+DNS” or
“MANUAL.”
97
Chapter
9
Internet Direct Connection (IDC) Service
IPAddr./SubMask/Gateway:
Enter the address of the control unit, subnet mask and gateway
server. These settings must be made when Use DHCP is set to
“MANUAL.”
Proxy/Proxy Port:
Enter the name and the port number for the proxy server. These
settings are necessary only when a proxy server is located in your
local network.
1
Press [SETUP] on the remote control.
The setup menu screen appears.
(1/2)]
=SETUP MENU=
*TimerPlay *AudioI/O
*MIDI
*M-tune
2
Select “Network” with the cursor buttons ([
[ ]), then press [ENTER].
][
][
]
}
The network setting screen appears.
3
] Select a desired option with the cursor buttons ([ ] [
[ ] [ ]), then press [+/YES] and [–/NO] to change
setting.
If you select “Information” on the network setting screen, the
current network setting appears. To return to the network setting
screen, press [ENTER] after confirming.
98
]
Chapter
Internet Direct Connection (IDC) Service
4
9
Press [ENTER] to complete the operation.
English
Initializing Internet Settings
[SETUP]
“Reset”
If you want to initialize the Internet settings, first you must reset the
Disklavier to its initial factory setting.
However, cookies are still remain after parameter resetting. To delete
cookies, perform the appropriate operation on the reset screen.
)
For details on cookies, see Chapter
15 “Glossary” on page 124.
)
See Chapter 11 “Other Settings –
Resetting the Disklavier” on
page 110.
99
Chapter
10
Enhancing the Disklavier by Hooking
Up Other Devices
Hooking Up AV Equipment
If you connect the Disklavier to an audio system, you can hear the sound
played/played back on the Disklavier from the connected audio system,
and the sound played back on the connected audio system from the
Disklavier.
AV amplifier
To audio
inputs
RCA cord
(not supplied)
CD player, etc.
To audio
outputs
RCA cord
(not supplied)
Control unit
100
Chapter
Enhancing the Disklavier by Hooking Up Other Devices
10
Setting the Disklavier for Audio Data Reception/Transmission
[SETUP]
“AudioI/O”
You can select the kind of the incoming/going out audio signals. The
following options should be set up in advance.
English
OMNI IN
Selects the appropriate option to match the incoming data input to the
OMNI (SYNC) IN jacks.
Auto Detect:
Select this when you make the Disklavier detect the input
signal automatically.
Audio:
Select this when you play back an audio software on the
connected CD player, etc. and reproduce the sound from the
monitor speakers*.
OFF:
Select this when you cancel the data reception from the OMNI
(SYNC) IN jacks.
* Only for models supplied with
the monitor speakers.
OMNI IN Vol
Adjust the volume of the incoming audio signals to the OMNI (SYNC) IN
jacks. The volume can be set in a range of 000 to 127.
OMNI OUT
Selects the desired data to be output from the OMNI (SYNC) OUT jacks.
Output:
Select this when you output the same audio signals as the
ones for the monitor speakers*.
SYNC:
Select this when you output the SMPTE signal used for video
synchronization playback.
OFF:
Select this when you cancel the data transmission from the
OMNI (SYNC) OUT jacks.
* Only for models supplied with
the monitor speakers.
OMNI OUT Vol
Adjust the volume of the outgoing audio signals to the OMNI (SYNC) OUT
jacks. The volume can be set in a range of 000 to 127, or to “M-Volume.”
When you set to “M-Volume”, the OMNI OUT volume works with the main
volume.
ANALOG MIDI IN Vol
Note:
“M-Volume” is the next increment
on the OMNI OUT Vol setting
above 127.
OMNI OUT
Vol parameter
[–/NO]
000
~
Adjust the volume of the incoming audio signals to the ANALOG MIDI IN
jacks. The volume can be set in a range of 000 to 127.
127
[+/YES]
M-Volume
101
Chapter
10
Enhancing the Disklavier by Hooking Up Other Devices
SYNC IN Offset
Adjusts the length of the offset time that leads the actual playback of entire
recording. The offset time can be set in a range of –500ms to +500ms.
Decrease this value to delay the piano playing, and increase to advance
the piano playing.
SYNC OUT Level
Adjusts the output level of the SMPTE signal. For normal use, the
adjustment of this option is not required. If noises (synchronized signal) are
output from the OUTPUT jacks during video synchronized playback, turn
down the level and re-record.
1
Press [SETUP] on the remote control.
The setup menu screen appears.
{
2
Select “AudioI/O” with the cursor buttons ([
[ ]), then press [ENTER].
][
][
]
3
Select a desired option with the cursor buttons ([
then press [+/YES] and [–/NO] to change setting.
][
]),
4
Press [ENTER] to complete the operation.
{
The audio I/O setting screen appears.
] 102
Chapter
Enhancing the Disklavier by Hooking Up Other Devices
10
Hooking Up MIDI Devices
MIDI (an acronym for Musical Instrument Digital Interface) allows
electronic device (synthesizers, etc.) to interact and work in
synchronization with other MIDI compatible device. The Disklavier enables
you to enjoy a variety of MIDI features by connecting a MIDI device or
computer to the Disklavier’s control unit.
Note:
Be sure to use the commercially
available MIDI cable with the Lshaped connector on the control unit
end.
To USB
port
USB cable
(not supplied)
To MIDI
input
English
MIDI device (sequencer, synthesizer, etc.) or computer
Note:
When you use the USB connection,
it is required to install the USB
driver to the connected device. In
such a case, visit the following
website and download the driver.
http://www.global.yamaha.
com/download/usb_midi/
To MIDI
output
MIDI cable
(not supplied)
Control unit
Setting the Disklavier for MIDI Data Reception
[SETUP]
“MIDI”
The Disklavier can play back the MIDI data being received from the
connected MIDI device as well as the software loaded or stored in the
Disklavier itself. The following options should be set up in advance.
MIDI IN Port
Selects the terminal/port used for the data reception.
MIDI:
Select this when the MIDI device is connected to MIDI IN
terminal.
USB:
Select this when the MIDI device is connected to USB port.
103
Chapter
10
Enhancing the Disklavier by Hooking Up Other Devices
Piano Rcv Ch
The MIDI data consists of multi channels that are respectively assigned to
a certain instrument’s part. This option assigns the desired channel(s) to
the piano part(s) that is (are) played back on the Disklavier’s keyboard.
01 thru 16: Select the desired channel to which you assign the piano part.
1+2:
Select this when the “01” and “02” channels are assigned to the
piano parts.
Prg:
Select the smallest number channel assigned to the piano
group voice (see page 115) to be played on the Disklavier.
Prg(All):
Select all channels assigned to the piano group voice (see
page 115) to be played on the Disklavier.
MIDI IN Delay
When the Disklavier receives two kinds of data (strong and weak note) at
the same time, the weak note sounds a little bit later than the strong one
due to the characteristics of the Disklavier’s mechanism. To eliminate this
delay in the sound reproduction and the notes are sounded in accurate
timing at 500 millisecond after the data reception, usually a delay is applied
to the incoming MIDI data.
ON:
Select this when you apply this delay to the incoming MIDI
data.
OFF:
Select this when you do not apply this delay.
1
Press [SETUP] on the remote control.
The setup menu screen appears.
{
2
Select “MIDI” with the cursor buttons ([
then press [ENTER].
{
The MIDI setting screen appears.
=MIDI=
] -+
>MIDI IN Port=MIDI
>Piano Rcv Ch=01
104
][
][
][
]),
Chapter
Enhancing the Disklavier by Hooking Up Other Devices
Select a desired option with the cursor buttons ([
then press [+/YES] and [–/NO] to change setting.
4
Press [ENTER] to complete the operation.
][
]),
English
3
10
Setting the Disklavier for MIDI Data Transmission
[SETUP]
“MIDI”
The Disklavier can transmit the information of piano playing/ensemble part
playback on the Disklavier as the MIDI data to the connected MIDI device
to reproduce the sound with its sound generator, etc. or to record the MIDI
data. The following options should be set up in advance.
MIDI OUT Port
Selects the terminal/port used for the data transmission.
MIDI:
Select this when the MIDI device is connected to MIDI OUT
terminal.
USB:
Select this when the MIDI device is connected to USB port.
MIDI OUT
Selects one of the following parts to be transmitted to the connected MIDI
device.
ESBL Out: Select this when you transmit the ensemble part played back
on the Disklavier.
KBD Out: Select this when you transmit the piano part played on the
Disklavier.
1
Press [SETUP] on the remote control.
The setup menu screen appears.
{
105
Chapter
10
Enhancing the Disklavier by Hooking Up Other Devices
2
Select “MIDI” with the cursor buttons ([
then press [ENTER].
][
][
][
]),
3
Select a desired option with the cursor buttons ([
then press [+/YES] and [–/NO] to change setting.
][
]),
4
Press [ENTER] to complete the operation.
{
The MIDI setting screen appears.
=MIDI=
] -+
>MIDI IN Port=MIDI
>Piano Rcv Ch=01
Setting the Disklavier for Keyboard Playing Data Transmission
[SETUP]
“MIDI”
Besides the MIDI OUT options, more detailed setups for the keyboard
playing data transmission are available. The following options should be
set up in advance.
KBD OUT CH
Assigns the piano part to the desired channels.
01 thru 16: Select the desired channel to which you assign the piano part.
106
Chapter
Enhancing the Disklavier by Hooking Up Other Devices
10
Local
Selects whether you reproduce or not the piano part playing with the
Disklavier’s internal tone generator.
Select this when you reproduce the piano part with the
Disklavier’s internal tone generator.
OFF:
Select this when you reproduce the song (played on the
Disklavier) on the external MIDI device. This option inactivates
the internal tone generator to prevent both the internal and
external tone generator sound at the same time.
1
English
ON:
Press [SETUP] on the remote control.
The setup menu screen appears.
{
2
Select “MIDI” with the cursor buttons ([
then press [ENTER].
][
][
][
]),
3
Select a desired option with the cursor buttons ([
then press [+/YES] and [–/NO] to change setting.
][
]),
4
Press [ENTER] to complete the operation.
{
The MIDI setting screen appears.
=MIDI=
] -+
>MIDI IN Port=MIDI
>Piano Rcv Ch=01
107
Chapter
11
Other Settings
Tuning the Tone Generator (TG Master Tune)
[SETUP]
“M–Tune”
The internal XG tone generator has already been tuned to match the
acoustic piano (A3=440 Hz). However, you can re-tune the internal XG
tone generator in accordance with the pitch of the acoustic piano by
following the procedure below.
1
Press [SETUP] on the remote control.
The setup menu screen appears.
{
2
Select “M-Tune” with the cursor buttons ([
[ ]), then press [ENTER].
][
][
]
{
The TG Master Tune setting screen appears.
=TG Master Tune=
>Tune= 000cent
3
-+
Playing the keyboard, press [+/YES] and [–/NO] to tune the
pitch of the internal XG tone generator.
The same note will sound simultaneously on the XG tone
generator’s digital piano and on the acoustic piano as soon as you
play the keyboard.
The pitch of the internal XG tone generator can be adjusted in a
range of –50 cent to +50 cent.
108
Chapter
Other Settings
4
Note:
To reset to the default factory pitch
settings, see Chapter 11 “Other
Settings – Resetting the Disklavier”
on page 110.
Press [ENTER] to complete the operation.
English
Switching the Languages for the Screen
1
11
Press [SYSTEM] on the remote control.
The system menu screen appears.
!"#${
2
Select “Language” with the cursor buttons ([
[ ]), then press [ENTER].
][
][
]
}
The language setting screen appears.
=Language=
Language=English
3
-+ENT
Press [+/YES] and [–/NO] to select the language.
109
Chapter
11
Other Settings
4
Press [ENTER].
“OK?” flashes in the first line of the screen.
5
Press [+/YES] to set the language, and return to the
system menu screen.
Resetting the Disklavier
[SETUP]
“Reset”
If you want to return your Disklavier to its initial factory, follow the
procedure below.
1
Important:
If you reset your Disklavier,
depends upon the option what you
select, you may lose all parameters
or all data in the internal memory, or
both of these. For normal use, you
do not have to reset. Necessarily
case you have to reset your
Disklavier, Yamaha strongly
recommends that you backup your
songs in the internal memory.
However, you cannot backup your
various parameter settings.
Press [SETUP] on the remote control.
The setup menu screen appears.
{
2
Select “Reset” with the cursor buttons ([
[ ]), then press [ENTER].
}
The reset screen appears.
-+ENT
=Reset=
>Reset=Parameter
110
][
][
]
)
To make a backup copy of the songs
which are in the internal memory,
see Chapter 8 “Media Management
– Making Backups of Songs” on
page 89.
Chapter
Other Settings
3
Press [+/YES] and [–/NO] to select the option that you
want to reset.
English
4
11
Option
Description
Parameter
Reset all parameters, excluding the clock setting
and the Internet setting.
Memory
Reset the internal memory.
Factory Init.
Reset the Disklavier to its initial factory setting.
DeleteCookies
Delete the contents of all saved cookies.
Press [ENTER].
“OK?” flashes in the first line of the screen.
=Reset=
OK? YES/NO
>Reset=Factory Init.
5
Press [+/YES] to reset, [–/NO] to cancel.
=Reset=
Executing...
=Reset=
Completed.
Press any button.
ANY
After a while, the completion message appears.
Press any button to return to the system menu screen.
111
Chapter
11
Other Settings
Diagnosing the Disklavier (Maintenance Mode)
[SYSTEM]
“Maintenance”
The piano diagnostics may be required as the occasion demands. In such
a case, follow the instructions of your Yamaha dealer and perform the
following procedure.
1
Press [SYSTEM] on the remote control.
The system menu screen appears.
!"#${
2
Select “Maintenance” with the cursor buttons ([
[ ] [ ]), then press [ENTER].
}
The maintenance screen appears.
Maintenance Mode
(ENT)
3
Press [ENTER].
The maintenance options appears.
(Grand piano)
1.Post Delivery Check
2.Program Versions
3.Pedal Calibration
(Upright piano)
112
][
]
Chapter
Other Settings
4
Select a desired option with the cursor buttons ([
then press [ENTER].
][
]),
Note:
Do not execute these options with
no instructions from the service
personnel.
English
The selected option is executed.
5
11
Press [STOP] to complete the operation.
Updating the Disklavier
Shut down the Disklavier
[PLAY/PAUSE] and [ON/OFF]
You can update the Disklavier firmware using update program (on the
update CD-ROM, or downloaded via Internet).
1
Make sure that Disklavier is shut down.
2
Holding [PLAY/PAUSE] on the control unit, press [ON/OFF].
+
)
For this operation you have to insert
the update CD-ROM or download
update program via Internet, and
shut down the Disklavier.
CTRL system V1.00
*UPDATE
(ENT)
Hold
The current version information of each module appears one after
the other.
3
Make sure that the update program is prepared, then press
[ENTER].
The starting screen appears.
After a while, the update confirmation message of each module
appears.
{ V1.01
V1.00
CTRL-SURE? (PLAY,STOP)
113
Chapter
11
Other Settings
4
Press [PLAY/PAUSE] to update, [STOP] to skip to the next
module.
{ When the update of the selected module completes, the update
confirmation message of the next module appears. Repeat step 3
and 4.
The closing screen appears when the update for all modules
completes.
5
114
Restart the Disklavier.
Chapter
12
Internal Tone Generator Voices
The following table lists the basic voices for the internal GM/XG and TG3 tone generator.
Internal GM/XG Tone Generator Basic Voice List
Display Name
Voice #
Display Name
Voice #
043
Orgel
086
Display Name
OrgFlute
001
GrandPno
044
Vibes
087
TrmOrgFl
002
GrandPnoK
045
VibesK
088
ReedOrgn
003
MelloGrP
046
HardVibe
089
Puff Org
004
PianoStr
047
Marimba
090
Acordion
005
Dream
048
MarimbaK
091
Accordlt
006
BritePno
049
SineMrmb
092
Harmnica
007
BritPnoK
050
Balafon2
093
Harmo 2
008
E.Grand
051
Log Drum
094
TangoAcd
009
EIGrPnoK
052
Xylophon
095
TngoAcd2
010
Det.CP80
053
TubulBel
04 Guitar
011
ElGrPno1
054
ChrchBel
096
NylonGtr
012
ElGrPno2
055
Carillon
097
NylonGt2
013
HnkyTonk
056
Dulcimer
098
NylonGt3
014
HnkyTnkK
057
Dulcimr2
099
VelGtHrm
015
E.Piano1
058
Cimbalom
100
Ukulele
016
El.Pno1K
059
Santur
101
SteelGtr
017
MelloEP1
03 Organ
102
SteelGt2
018
Chor.EP1
060
DrawOrgn
103
12StrGtr
019
HardEl.P
061
DetDrwOr
104
Nyln&Stl
020
VX El.P1
062
60sDrOr1
105
Stl&Body
021
60sEl.P
063
60sDrOr2
106
Mandolin
022
E.Piano2
064
70sDrOr1
107
Jazz Gtr
023
El.Pno2K
065
DrawOrg2
108
MelloGtr
024
Chor.EP2
066
60sDrOr3
109
JazzAmp
025
DX Hard
067
EvenBar
110
CleanGtr
026
DXLegend
068
16+2”2/3
111
ChorusGt
027
DX Phase
069
Organ Ba
112
Mute.Gtr
028
DX+Analg
070
70sDrOr2
113
FunkGtr1
029
DXKotoEP
071
CheezOrg
114
MuteStlG
030
VX El.P2
072
DrawOrg3
115
FunkGtr2
031
Harpsi.
073
PercOrgn
116
Jazz Man
032
Harpsi.K
074
70sPcOr1
117
Ovrdrive
033
Harpsi.2
075
DetPrcOr
118
Gt.Pinch
034
Harpsi.3
076
LiteOrg
119
Dist.Gtr
035
Clavi.
077
PercOrg2
120
FeedbkGt
036
Clavi.K
078
RockOrgn
121
FeedbGt2
037
ClaviWah
079
RotaryOr
122
GtrHarmo
038
PulseClv
080
SloRotar
123
GtFeedbk
039
PierceCl
081
FstRotar
124
GtrHrmo2
02 ChromaticPerc
082
ChrchOrg
Celesta
083
ChurOrg3
125
Aco.Bass
041
Glocken
084
ChurOrg2
126
JazzRthm
042
MusicBox
085
NotreDam
127
VXUprght
040
English
Voice #
01 Piano
05 Bass
115
Chapter
12
Internal Tone Generator Voices
Voice #
116
Display Name
Voice #
128
FngrBass
178
129
FingrDrk
130
FlangeBa
179
131
Ba&DstEG
180
132
FngrSlap
133
FngBass2
134
135
Display Name
Timpani
Voice #
Display Name
227
Tp&TbSec
228
BrssSec2
Strings1
229
HiBrass
S.Strngs
230
MelloBrs
181
SlowStr
231
SynBras1
182
ArcoStr
232
QuackBr
ModAlem
183
60sStrng
233
RezSynBr
PickBass
184
Orchestr
234
PolyBrss
136
MutePkBa
185
Orchstr2
235
SynBras3
137
Fretless
186
TremOrch
236
JumpBrss
138
Fretles2
187
VeloStr
237
AnaVelBr
139
Fretles3
188
Strings2
238
AnaBrss1
140
Fretles4
189
S.SlwStr
239
SynBras2
141
SynFretl
190
LegatoSt
240
Soft Brs
142
Smooth
191
Warm Str
241
SynBras4
143
SlapBas1
192
Kingdom
242
ChorBrss
144
ResoSlap
193
70s Str
243
VelBras2
145
PunchThm
194
Str Ens3
244
AnaBrss2
146
SlapBas2
195
Syn.Str1
147
VeloSlap
196
ResoStr
245
148
SynBass1
197
Syn Str4
246
Alto Sax
149
SynBa1Dk
198
SS Str
247
Sax Sect
150
FastResB
199
Syn.Str2
248
HyprAlto
151
AcidBass
200
ChoirAah
249
TenorSax
152
Clv Bass
201
S.Choir
250
BrthTnSx
153
TeknoBa
202
Ch.Aahs2
251
SoftTenr
154
Oscar
203
MelChoir
252
TnrSax 2
155
SqrBass
204
ChoirStr
253
Bari.Sax
156
RubberBa
205
VoiceOch
254
Oboe
157
Hammer
206
SynVoice
255
Eng.Horn
158
SynBass2
207
SynVox2
256
Bassoon
159
MelloSB1
208
Choral
257
Clarinet
160
Seq Bass
209
AnaVoice
161
ClkSynBa
210
Orch.Hit
258
Piccolo
162
SynBa2Dk
211
OrchHit2
259
Flute
163
SmthBa 2
212
Impact
260
Recorder
164
ModulrBa
08 Brass
165
DX Bass
213
166
X WireBa
07 Ensemble
09 Reed
SprnoSax
10 Pipe
261
PanFlute
Trumpet
262
Bottle
214
Trumpet2
263
Shakhchi
06 Strings
215
BriteTrp
264
Whistle
167
Violin
216
WarmTrp
265
Ocarina
168
SlowVln
217
Trombone
169
Viola
218
Trmbone2
266
170
Cello
219
Tuba
267
Square 2
171
Contrabs
220
Tuba 2
268
LMSquare
172
Trem.Str
221
Mute.Trp
269
Hollow
173
SlwTrStr
222
Fr.Horn
270
Shmoog
174
Susp Str
223
FrHrSolo
271
Mellow
175
Pizz.Str
224
FrHorn2
272
SoloSine
176
Harp
225
HornOrch
273
SineLead
177
YangChin
226
BrasSect
274
Saw.Lead
11 Synth Lead
SquareLd
Chapter
Internal Tone Generator Voices
Voice #
Display Name
Voice #
Display Name
Voice #
Display Name
Saw 2
325
Halo Pad
375
BelChoir
276
ThickSaw
326
SweepPad
376
Echoes
277
DynaSaw
327
Shwimmer
377
EchoPad2
278
DigiSaw
328
Converge
378
Echo Pan
279
Big Lead
329
PolarPad
379
EchoBell
280
HeavySyn
330
Celstial
380
Big Pan
281
WaspySyn
13 Synth Effects
282
PulseSaw
331
283
Dr. Lead
284
VeloLead
285
381
SynPiano
Rain
382
Creation
332
ClaviPad
383
Stardust
333
HrmoRain
384
Reso Pan
Seq Ana
334
AfrcnWnd
385
Sci-Fi
286
CaliopLd
335
Caribean
386
Starz
287
Pure Pad
336
SoundTrk
14 Ethnic
288
Chiff Ld
337
Prologue
387
Sitar
289
Rubby
338
Ancestrl
388
DetSitar
290
CharanLd
339
Crystal
389
Sitar 2
291
DistLead
340
SynDrCmp
390
Tambra
292
WireLead
341
Popcorn
391
Tamboura
293
Voice Ld
342
TinyBell
392
Banjo
294
SynthAah
343
RndGlock
393
MuteBnjo
295
VoxLead
344
GlockChi
394
Rabab
296
Fifth Ld
345
ClearBel
395
Gopichnt
297
Big Five
346
ChorBell
396
Oud
298
Bass &Ld
347
SynMalet
397
Shamisen
299
Big&Low
348
SftCryst
398
Koto
300
Fat&Prky
349
LoudGlok
399
T.Koto
301
SoftWurl
350
XmasBell
400
Kanoon
351
VibeBell
401
Kalimba
NewAgePd
352
DigiBell
402
Bagpipe
303
Fantasy2
353
AirBells
403
Fiddle
304
Warm Pad
354
BellHarp
404
Shanai
305
ThickPad
355
Gamelmba
405
Shanai2
306
Soft Pad
356
Atmosphr
406
Pungi
307
SinePad
357
WarmAtms
407
Hichriki
308
Horn Pad
358
HollwRls
309
RotarStr
359
NylonEP
408
TnklBell
310
PolySyPd
360
NylnHarp
409
Bonang
311
PolyPd80
361
Harp Vox
410
Gender
312
ClickPad
362
AtmosPad
411
Gamelan
313
Ana Pad
363
Planet
412
S.Gamlan
314
SquarPad
364
Bright
413
Rama Cym
315
ChoirPad
365
FantaBel
414
AsianBel
316
Heaven2
366
Smokey
415
Agogo
317
ltopia
367
Goblins
416
SteelDrm
318
CC Pad
368
GobSyn
417
GlasPerc
319
BowedPad
369
50sSciFi
418
ThaiBell
320
Glacier
370
Ring Pad
419
WoodBlok
321
GlassPad
371
Ritual
420
Castanet
322
MetalPad
372
ToHeaven
421
TaikoDrm
323
Tine Pad
373
Night
422
Gr.Cassa
324
Pan Pad
374
Glisten
423
MelodTom
302
English
275
12 Synth Pad
12
15 Percussive
117
Chapter
12
Internal Tone Generator Voices
Voice #
Display Name
Voice #
Display Name
Voice #
Display Name
424
Mel Tom2
459
Feed
485
Punch
425
Real Tom
460
Dog
486
Heart
426
Rock Tom
461
Horse
487
FootStep
427
Syn.Drum
462
Bird 2
488
MchinGun
428
Ana Tom
463
Ghost
489
LaserGun
429
ElecPerc
464
Maou
490
Xplosion
430
RevCymbl
465
Tel.Dial
491
FireWork
466
DoorSqek
FretNoiz
467
DoorSlam
432
BrthNoiz
468
Scratch
433
Seashore
469
Scratch2
434
Tweet
470
WindChm
435
Telphone
471
Telphon2
436
Helicptr
472
CarEngin
437
Applause
473
Car Stop
438
Gunshot
474
Car Pass
475
CarCrash
16 Sound Effects
431
18 SFX Voice
450
CuttngNz
476
Siren
451
CttngNz2
477
Train
452
Str Slap
478
Jetplane
453
Fl.KClik
479
Starship
454
Rain
480
Burst
455
Thunder
481
Coaster
456
Wind
482
SbMarine
457
Stream
483
Laughing
458
Bubble
484
Scream
Internal GM/XG Tone
Generator Drum Voice
List
Voice #
Display Name
17 Drum Kit
439
StandKit
440
Stnd2Kit
441
Room Kit
442
Rock Kit
443
ElectKit
444
AnalgKit
445
Jazz Kit
446
BrushKit
447
ClascKit
448
SFX Kit1
449
SFX Kit2
Internal TG3 Tone Generator Basic Voice List
Voice #
Display Name
Display Name
Dulcimer
03 Organ
Voice #
Display Name
031
Dist.Gtr
032
GtrHarmo
001
GrandPno
002
BritePno
017
003
E.Grand
018
PercOrgn
033
Aco.Bass
004
HnkyTonk
019
RockOrgn
034
FngrBass
005
E.Piano1
020
ChrchOrg
035
PickBass
006
E.Piano2
021
ReedOrgn
036
Fretless
007
Harpsi.
022
Acordion
037
SlapBas1
008
Clavi.
023
Harmnica
038
SlapBas2
024
TangoAcd
039
SynBass1
040
SynBass2
02 ChromaticPerc
118
Voice #
016
01 Piano
009
Celesta
04 Guitar
010
Glocken
025
011
MusicBox
012
Vibes
013
Marimba
014
Xylophon
015
TubulBel
DrawOrgn
05 Bass
NylonGtr
06 Strings
026
SteelGtr
041
Violin
027
Jazz Gtr
042
Viola
028
CleanGtr
043
Cello
029
Mute.Gtr
044
Contrabs
030
Ovrdrive
045
Trem.Str
Chapter
Internal Tone Generator Voices
Voice #
Display Name
Voice #
Display Name
046
Pizz.Str
091
PolySyPd
047
Harp
092
ChoirPad
048
Timpani
093
BowedPad
094
MetalPad
07 Ensemble
Strings1
095
Halo Pad
050
Strings2
096
SweepPad
051
Syn.Str1
052
Syn.Str2
097
Rain
053
ChoirAah
098
SoundTrk
054
VoiceOoh
099
Crystal
055
SynVoice
100
Atmosphr
056
Orch.Hit
101
Bright
102
Goblins
13 Synth Effects
057
Trumpet
103
Echoes
058
Trombone
104
Sci-Fi
059
Tuba
060
Mute.Trp
105
Sitar
061
Fr.Horn
106
Banjo
062
BrasSect
107
Shamisen
063
SynBras1
108
Koto
064
SynBras2
109
Kalimba
110
Bagpipe
09 Reed
14 Ethnic
065
SprnoSax
111
Fiddle
066
Alto Sax
112
Shanai
067
TenorSax
068
Bari.Sax
113
TnklBell
069
Oboe
114
Agogo
070
Eng.Horn
115
SteelDrm
071
Bassoon
116
WoodBlok
072
Clarinet
117
TaikoDrm
118
MelodTom
10 Pipe
15 Percussive
073
Piccolo
119
Syn.Drum
074
Flute
120
RevCymbl
075
Recorder
16 Sound Effects
076
PanFlute
121
FretNoiz
077
Bottle
122
BrthNoiz
078
Shakhchi
123
Seashore
079
Whistle
124
Tweet
080
Ocarina
125
Telphone
126
Helicptr
11 Synth Lead
081
SquareLd
127
Applause
082
Saw.Lead
128
Gunshot
083
CaliopLd
084
Chiff Ld
085
CharanLd
086
Voice Ld
087
Fifth Ld
088
Bass &Ld
12 Synth Pad
089
NewAgePd
090
Warm Pad
English
049
08 Brass
12
Internal TG3 Tone
Generator Drum Voice
List
Voice #
Display Name
17 Drum Kit
129
StandKit
119
Chapter
13
Troubleshooting
If you are having difficulty operating the Disklavier, see if any of the symptoms listed below
apply to your problem and follow the recommended remedy.
Power
Symptom
The Diskalvier does not turn on.
Remedy
Make sure that the main switch on the power supply
unit is turned on.
Make sure that the AC power cable is securely
connected to a suitable AC wall outlet.
If the Disklavier still cannot be turned on, disconnect it
from the AC wall outlet, and consult your Disklavier
dealer.
Control Unit
Symptom
The control unit does not appear to work correctly.
The control unit becomes hot.
Remedy
Turn off the control unit, wait 5 seconds, then turn it
back on. If the problem continues, consult your
Disklavier dealer.
Although the chassis of the control unit may become
hot while the Disklavier is turned on (also in the standby
mode), this is not a malfunction.
Remote Control
Symptom
You cannot control the Disklavier using the remote
control.
Remedy
Make sure that you are pointing the remote control at
the control unit’s remote control sensor.
Make sure that you are within the remote control’s
specified operating range (approx. 5 m (16.4 ft)).
Make sure that the remote control’s batteries have
been installed correctly.
Check the condition of the remote control’s batteries.
Monitor Speakers*
Symptom
No sound is heard from the monitor speakers.
* Only for models supplied with the monitor speakers.
120
Remedy
Make sure that the POWER switches on both monitor
speakers are turned on.
Make sure that the monitor speakers are connected to
the OUTPUT jacks on the control unit with the supplied
speaker cords.
Make sure that the overall volume is adequately turned
up.
Make sure that the volume of the internal tone
generator, audio and voice are adequately turned up.
Certain model does not come with the monitor
speakers. In such a case, prepare active speakers
equivalent to the monitor speakers.
Chapter
Troubleshooting
13
Playback
Symptom
None of the playback functions can be used.
The Disklavier does not read a song file.
Songs are not played back in the normal song order.
The playback order differs from the order on another
device.
When selecting a song using the remote control’s
number keypad, but the last song on the album is
selected.
When specifying a search time using the remote
control’s number keypad, but the end of the song is
selected.
If a time value higher than the total length of the song is
specified, the end of the song will be selected.
Some notes drop out during playback.
When a piano song is played back at a low volume,
complex note trills and faint pianissimo passages
sometimes drop out. In such case, increase the
Disklavier’s volume level.
PianoSmart™ playback cannot be performed.
Make sure that an appropriate SmartPianoSoft song,
which is paired with the song on commercial CDs, is
selected.
The pedals do not operate during playback.
Make sure that the pedal part is not canceled.
English
Songs are played back at the wrong tempo or in the
wrong key.
Remedy
Insert a medium that contains songs into the Disklavier.
The maximum number of the readable files in an album
is 999.
Make sure that the name of the SMF song has an
extension as “.MID” or “.mid” and the E-SEQ song has
“.FIL” or “.fil.”
Reset the tempo or transposition changes. Once the
tempo or transposition have been changed, they will
affect playback of all songs on an album, until another
medium or album is selected, the recording standby
mode is engaged, the Disklavier is turned off, or they
are reset.
Make sure that the random repeat mode is off.
The playback order depends on the recording software
or other factors. Naming the file starting from numbers
such as 01, 02, etc. may solve the problem.
If a song number higher than the last song number on
the album is specified, the last song will be selected.
Tone Generator
Symptom
The ensemble parts cannot be heard during ensemble
song playback.
The pitch of the Disklavier and the internal tone
generator do not match.
Remedy
Make sure that the TG balance is set to an appropriate
level and readjust it.
Use the TG Master Tune function to tune the internal
tone generator.
Recording
Symptom
You cannot re-record.
Remedy
Re-recording is not possible on protected songs such
as PianoSoft and PianoSoft·Plus songs.
121
Chapter
13
Troubleshooting
Media
Symptom
The Disklavier does not recognize a USB flash
memory.
The Disklavier does not read a CD-R/RW disc.
Remedy
Certain USB storage devices may not function properly
with the Disklavier. For a list of compatible products,
please visit: www.yamaha.com/disklavier.
The audio CD should be formatted in CD-DA, and the
data CD in ISO 9660 Level1. The Disklavier may not
read a CD-R/RW disc other than this format.
Connection with External Devices
Symptom
The Disklavier cannot send or receive MIDI data with
other MIDI instruments.
A MIDI loop was accidentally created when you
connected a computer to the MIDI OUT terminal on
your Disklavier, so that song data is sent back and forth
between the computer and the Disklavier.
Remedy
Make sure that the MIDI cables are connected properly.
Configure the setting for the MIDI OUT terminal to
“KBD OUT.”
Video Synchronized Recording/Playback
Symptom
Synchronized songs are not played back.
Remedy
Make sure that the audio channels of the DVD recorder
are correctly connected to the Disklavier.
Make sure that the input and output of the DVD
recorder are correctly connected to the Disklavier.
Make sure that the “OMNI IN” option on the Disklavier
is set to “AutoDetect.”
Make sure that the “OMNI OUT” option on the
Disklavier is set to “SYNC.”
Noises are heard during recording.
Turn down the volume of the TV connected to the DVD
recorder.
Disconnect the left side connector of the RCA cord from
the OMNI OUT (L) jack on the Disklavier. This will not
affect the functionality of video synchronized recording.
Noises are heard during playback.
The level of the synchronized signal (SMPTE) from the
Disklavier may be too high. Turn down the level with the
“SYNC OUT Level” option and re-record.
The piano playback is not synchronized with the video The video picture may be delayed on the projection
picture.
device. Adjust the offset time with the “SYNC IN Offset”
to match the piano playing and the video picture.
The beginning of the piano performance is dropped out It may take some time until the Disklavier recognizes
when you play back the synchronized song.
the synchronized signal and the piano begins to play
back. Select the synchronized song in advance, and
then start playback on the camcorder. Note that you
should wait for a while before playing the piano after
recording begins on the camcorder.
122
Chapter
14
Error Messages
While operating your Disklavier, an error message may appear in the display. If an error
message appears, refer to the table below for an explanation of the message.
Media Selection / Playback
Situation
Remedy
NO MEDIA!
You selected the medium that has not
been inserted.
Insert the medium or select another
medium.
DIFFERENT CD!
Your CD is not paired with the selected
SmartPiano song.
Insert appropriate CD that is paired with
the SmartPiano song.
Error Messages
Situation
Remedy
CANNOT EXECUTE.
NOT ENOUGH DISK SPACE
You tried to copy a song to the medium
that has no disk space.
Try another medium or delete songs on
the media to make disk space.
CANNOT EXECUTE.
NO DESTINATION MEDIUM
You selected the destination medium
that has not been inserted when
copying the album.
Insert the destination medium and
select it.
DISK WRITE PROTECTED!
You tried to copy songs or albums to
the medium with the protection tab set
to “protected”.
Set the protection tab of the medium to
“unprotected”.
CANNOT EXECUTE.
PROTECTED FILE
You tried to copy the protected song file
to the removable medium such as a
USB flash memory.
You cannot copy the protected file to
the removable medium.
Deleted all songs in this album
You tried to delete the album with sub
folders on the external medium.
CANNOT EXECUTE TO CREATE
MORE THAN 99 ALBUMS
You tried to create a new album on the
medium that already contains 99
albums.
No more than 99 albums can be created
on the medium.
CANNOT EXECUTE TO CREATE
MORE THAN 999 SONGS
You tried to create a new song in the
album that already contains 999 songs.
No more than 999 songs can be created
in the album.
CANNOT EXECUTE.
SAME TITLE EXISTS
You tried to rename an album as same
as the album that already exists.
Enter the different title to an album.
You tried to rename a playlist as same
as the playlist that already exists.
Enter the different title to a playlist.
You tried to add songs to the playlist,
but no playlist exists.
First, you must create a new playlist,
and then add songs to it.
Error Messages
Situation
Remedy
SELECT RECORD TRACK
You tried to start re-recording with no
part selected.
Select the part to record before starting
re-recording.
English
Error Messages
File Operation
CANNOT EXECUTE.
NO PLAYLIST
Recording
Timer Play
Error Messages
Situation
Remedy
SAME TIME EVENT EXIST!
CHANGE THE TIME
You tried to set two different
programs with the same time for
timer playback.
You cannot set two different program with the
same time.
123
Chapter
15
Glossary
This glossary provides basic definitions of terms used frequently in Disklavier manuals.
Clavinova™
General MIDI (GM)
A series of Yamaha digital pianos.
An addition to the MIDI standard that simplifies the
transfer of MIDI song files between instruments of
different manufacturers. A MIDI song recorded
using a GM compatible tone generator should play
back correctly when used with any GM compatible
tone generator. The standard specifies that a GM
compatible tone generator must support 24-note
polyphony, 16 parts, and 128 standard voices.
Continuous Pedal
See “Incremental Pedal.”
Cookie
A computer data file that stores certain information
for use when revisiting a website. In the case of the
Disklavier, cookies are used to store ID and
password for the IDC service.
Half Pedal
See “Incremental Pedal.”
DHCP
This is a standard or protocol by which IP
addresses and other low-level network
configuration information can be dynamically and
automatically assigned each time a connection is
made to the Internet.
DNS
A system that translates names of computers
connected to a network to their corresponding IP
addresses.
Ensemble Song
A song which contains piano parts and
accompanying instrumental voices. An ensemble
song contains the same left- and right-hand parts
as an L/R song, and in addition, up to 13
accompanying instrument tracks. These extra
tracks are played by the internal XG tone
generator. The accompanying tracks may be used
for acoustic bass, drums, strings, vibes, etc.
Piano pedals are not always completely up or down
and may be held somewhere in-between. Using
incremental pedal data (also called continuous or
half pedal data) the Disklavier precisely records the
up and down movement of the piano pedals.
Internet
A huge network made up of networks, the Internet
allows high-speed data transfer among computers,
mobile phones and other devices.
IP Address
A string of numbers assigned to each computer
connected to a network, and indicating the device’s
location on the network.
LAN
E-SEQ Song Format
Short for Local Area Network, this is a data-transfer
network that connects a group of computers at a
single location (such as an office or home) by
means of a special cable.
A song file format developed by Yamaha for saving
songs.
L/R Song
Floppy Disk
The magnetic storage medium that the Disklavier
uses to save songs. With the optional USB floppy
drive, you can use the 3.5 inch 2DD and 2HD
floppy disks commonly used for computers.
Gateway
A system which links different networks or systems,
and makes possible data transfer and conversion
despite differing communications standards.
124
Incremental Pedal
In a L/R song, the left-hand piano part is stored on
track 1 (L) and the right-hand piano part is stored
on track 2 (R). During playback you can cancel
either part, and then play that part yourself. When
recording an L/R song, you can record the two
parts simultaneously or separately.
Chapter
Glossary
MIDI
Router
An acronym for Musical Instrument Digital
Interface. MIDI allows electronic musical
instruments to communicate with each other.
A device for connecting multiple computer
networks. For example, a router is necessary when
connecting several computers in a house or office,
to allow all of them access the Internet and share
data. A router is usually connected between a
modem and a computer, although some modems
have a built-in router.
Modem
Sequencer
English
A device which connects and allows data transfer
between a conventional telephone line and a
computer. It converts the digital signals from the
computer to analog audio for sending over the
phone line, and vice versa.
15
A sequencer can be used with the Disklavier to play
back and record MIDI data.
Piano Parts
Refer to the left- and right-hand piano parts of a
song. The left-hand piano part is recorded onto
track 1 and the right-hand piano part is recorded
onto track 2. These track assignments are the
default settings and can be changed.
Server
A hardware system or computer used as a central
point for a network, providing access to files and
services.
SmartPianoSoft™
PianoSoft™
The PianoSoft Disk Collection is a library of
prerecorded song disks made by Yamaha
specifically for use with the Disklavier.
Software made by Yamaha containing MIDI signals
for playing back along with standard audio CDs.
SMF
Abbreviation for Standard MIDI File.
PianoSoft·Plus™
PianoSoft·Plus disks contain Ensemble songs that
can be played on the Disklavier.
SMF Song Format
A song file format supported by MIDI sequencers
and music software.
Polyphony
The maximum number of voices (or sounds) that
can be produced at a time from MIDI instruments.
Provider
A communications business that offers Internet
connection services. In order to connect to the
Internet, it is necessary to contract to a provider.
Song
Normally, a short piece of music with lyrics.
However, for clarity in Disklavier manuals, the term
is used to refer to any piece of music of any genre.
Standard MIDI File (SMF)
A file of MIDI data that can be read and used by a
number of different MIDI devices and computers.
Proxy
A proxy server is a server that all computers on a
local network have to go through before accessing
information on the Internet. It intercepts all or
designated requests to the real server to see if it
can fulfill the requests itself. If not, it forwards the
request to the real server. Proxy servers are used
to improve performance and speed, and to filter
requests, usually for security and to prevent
unauthorized access to an internal network.
Subnet Mask
A setting used to divide a large-scale network into
several smaller networks.
TG Master Tune
The function that allows you to tune the internal XG
tone generator, and if connected, an external tone
generator simultaneously so that their tunings
match that of the Disklavier.
125
Chapter
15
Glossary
Tone Generator
An electronic device that can generate tones or
instrument voices.
Transpose
Changing the key of a song. For example, a song in
the key of C is transposed to the key of D when it is
moved up two semitones.
USB
An interface for connecting an external device with
plug and play. The Disklavier supplies with 2 TO
DEVICE terminal with USB 1.1 standard and 1 TO
HOST terminal. You can use as the external
memory media if connected a USB flash memory or
a USB hard disk to TO DEVICE terminal. Also the
Disklavier enables you to enjoy a variety of MIDI
features by connecting a computer to TO HOST
terminal.
Voice
The sounds produced by a tone generator
expressing various instruments.
Web Page
Refers to each individual page that makes up a
website.
Website
This refers to the group of web pages that are
opened together. For example, the collection of
web pages whose addresses begin with “http://
www.yamaha.com/ ” is referred to as the Yamaha
site.
XG
Yamaha XG is an extension of the GM (General
MIDI) format. Its greater polyphony, more voices,
and use of effects enhances the compatibility
between MIDI devices. When a song in the
Yamaha XG format is played on another XGcompatible tone generator or synthesizer, it plays
and sounds as the original composer/creator
intended.
126
Chapter
16
Specifications
General
Upright Piano
Sensor System
Pedal Sensors
Drive System
Data Storage
Noncontact optical fiber/grayscale shutter sensing system for 88 keys
(senses the key position, keying velocity, and key releasing velocity)
Damper & soft pedals: Incremental
optical position-sensing system
Damper & shift pedals:
Incremental optical positionsensing system
Sostenuto pedal: Optical ON/OFF
detection sensing system
Keys
DSP servo drive system (servocontrolled solenoids)
Pedals
DSP servo drive system (servocontrolled solenoids)
Internal Memory
128 MB
Compact Disc
Audio CD (CD-DA), Data CD (ISO 9660 Level1-compliant)
USB Flash Memory
Yamaha does not assure the operation of the commercially available
USB flash memories. For a list of compatible products, please visit:
www.yamaha.com/disklavier.
USB Hard Disk
FAT32 format
Yamaha does not assure the operation of the commercially available
USB hard disks.
Floppy Disk
3.5” 2DD (720 KB) or 2HD (1.44 MB) floppy disk*1
Removable Media
File Format
Standard MIDI File (SMF) format 0, Standard MIDI File (SMF) format 1,
E-SEQ format
Song Format
PianoSoft (Solo), PianoSoft·Plus, PianoSoft·PlusAudio,
SmartPianoSoft, SmartKey (CueTIME)
Drive
Control Unit
Monitor Speaker*2
Connectors
Ensemble Tone
CD (read only)
Dimensions (W × H × D)
292 × 49 × 216 mm (11-1/2” × 1-15/16” × 8-1/2”)
Weight
2.7 kg (5.95 lb)
Rated Power Output
20 W × 2 with tone and volume controls
Drivers
10 cm (3-15/16”) woofer × 2, 2.2 cm (7/8”) tweeter × 2
Dimensions (W × H × D)
144 × 236 × 167 mm (5-11/16” × 9-5/16” × 6-9/16”)
Weight
4.4 kg (9.70 lb)
MIDI
MIDI IN, MIDI OUT
Audio
OUTPUT, ANALOG MIDI IN, OMNI IN, OMNI OUT
Others
LAN, USB (1 × TO HOST, 2 × TO DEVICE)
Type
Advanced Wave Memory 2 (AWM2)
Polyphony
32 notes (max.)
Ensemble Parts
16 parts
Voice Module Modes
XG, GM
Normal Voices
676 voices
Pitch Control
English
Key Sensors
Grand Piano
Set at A=440 Hz, tunable -50 to +50 cents in 1 cent increment
Drum Voices
21 kits
Power Source
Local AC current, 120V, 60 Hz
Supplied Accessories
Control unit (1), control unit suspension bracket (1)*3, screw for control unit
suspension bracket installation (4 × 10) (4)*3, screw for control unit
suspension (5 × 12) (3)*3, screw for optional USB floppy disk drive
installation (3 × 6) (4)*3, monitor speaker (2)*2, monitor speaker installation
kit (1)*2, speaker cord (2)*2, remote control (1), battery for remote control (2),
sample PianoSoft CD software (2), quick reference (1), operation manual
(1), PianoSoft CD song list (1), Music book “50 greats for the piano” (1)
Optional Accessories
USB floppy disk drive (UD-FD01)
127
Chapter
16
Specifications
Function & Controls
Playback Functions
Playback Controls
Recording
Functions
Piano Playing
Functions
Metronome
Utility Functions
Media Select
Internal memory, CD, USB media (including floppy disk)
Song Select
Cursor buttons (control unit), cursor buttons/numeric section (remote
control)
Basic Functions
Play, stop, pause
Song Search
Reverse/forward w/sound (MIDI songs), reverse/forward w/o sound
(audio songs), directly by time or measure.
Repeat
ALL (all songs in current album), RPT (current song), RND (all songs in
current album in random order), A-B
Part Cancel
L (left), R (right), pedal
Timer Playback
See page 34.
Video Synchronization
See page 39.
SmartKey™ Playback
See page 40.
PianoSmart™ Playback
See page 40.
Volume
11 levels (–10 to 0)
Tempo
–50 to 50% in 1% increment
Transposition
–24 to +24 semitones (2 octaves) in 1 semitone increment
Balance (TG, Audio)
10 to 127
Piano Part Recording
L/R overwrite, split
Metronome Mode
Recording
See page 47.
Tempo Changing
See page 54.
Video Synchronization
See page 56.
Audio CD Synchronization
See page 60.
XG Voices
Approx. 500 voices
Range
30 to 400 beats per minute
Time Signatures
1/4, 2/4, 3/4, 4/4, 5/4, 6/4, 7/4, 8/4, 9/4
Volume
Controllable
Song
Copy, delete, rename, sort, add to playlist, type convert, time format
convert, strip XP
Album
Copy, delete, create, rename, sort, add to playlist
Playlist
Create, delete, rename
Backup/Restore
Floppy Disk
*1
DisklavierRadio
Network Functions
See pages 89 and 90.
Format
See pages 25 and 94.
FromToPC
See pages 84 and 87.
Network Update
See page 96.
Update
Firmware update with the update CD or via the Internet
Specifications are subject to change without prior notice.
Note:
128
*1
Possible for optional floppy disk drive (UD-FD01).
*2
Only for models supplied with the monitor speakers.
*3
Only for grand pianos.
Appendix
Appendix
Software License Notice
GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
Version 2, June 1991
Copyright © 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307 USA
Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document,
but changing it is not allowed.
■ Preamble
The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change it. By
contrast, the GNU General Public License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and
change free software — to make sure the software is free for all its users. This General Public
License applies to most of the Free Software Foundation’s software and to any other program
whose authors commit to using it. (Some other Free Software Foundation software is covered by
the GNU Library General Public License instead.) You can apply it to your programs, too.
For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether gratis or for a fee, you must give
the recipients all the rights that you have. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get
the source code. And you must show them these terms so they know their rights.
We protect your rights with two steps: (1) copyright the software, and (2) offer you this license
which gives you legal permission to copy, distribute and/or modify the software.
Software License Notice
To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid anyone to deny you these rights or
to ask you to surrender the rights. These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if
you distribute copies of the software, or if you modify it.
Appendix
When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not price. Our General Public
Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free
software (and charge for this service if you wish), that you receive source code or can get it if you
want it, that you can change the software or use pieces of it in new free programs; and that you
know you can do these things.
Also, for each author’s protection and ours, we want to make certain that everyone understands
that there is no warranty for this free software. If the software is modified by someone else and
passed on, we want its recipients to know that what they have is not the original, so that any
problems introduced by others will not reflect on the original authors’ reputations.
Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by software patents. We wish to avoid the
danger that redistributors of a free program will individually obtain patent licenses, in effect making
the program proprietary.
To prevent this, we have made it clear that any patent must be licensed for everyone’s free use or
not licensed at all.
The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification follow.
A-1
Software License Notice
GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION
AND MODIFICATION
0
This License applies to any program or other work which contains a notice placed by the
copyright holder saying it may be distributed under the terms of this General Public License.
The “Program”, below, refers to any such program or work, and a “work based on the
Program” means either the Program or any derivative work under copyright law: that is to say,
a work containing the Program or a portion of it, either verbatim or with modifications and/or
translated into another language. (Hereinafter, translation is included without limitation in the
term modification.) Each licensee is addressed as “you”.
Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not covered by this License;
they are outside its scope. The act of running the Program is not restricted, and the output
from the Program is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the Program
(independent of having been made by running the Program). Whether that is true depends on
what the Program does.
1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Program’s source code as you receive it,
in any medium, provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an
appropriate copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the notices that refer to
this License and to the absence of any warranty; and give any other recipients of the Program
a copy of this License along with the Program.
You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and you may at your option
offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee.
2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any portion of it, thus forming a work
based on the Program, and copy and distribute such modifications or work under the terms of
Section 1 above, provided that you also meet all of these conditions:
a) You must cause the modified files to carry prominent notices stating that you changed the
files and the date of any change.
b) You must cause any work that you distribute or publish, that in whole or in part contains or
is derived from the Program or any part thereof, to be licensed as a whole at no charge to all
third parties under the terms of this License.
c) If the modified program normally reads commands interactively when run, you must cause
it, when started running for such interactive use in the most ordinary way, to print or display
an announcement including an appropriate copyright notice and a notice that there is no
warranty (or else, saying that you provide a warranty) and that users may redistribute the
program under these conditions, and telling the user how to view a copy of this License.
(Exception: if the Program itself is interactive but does not normally print such an
announcement, your work based on the Program is not required to print an announcement.)
These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If identifiable sections of that work are
not derived from the Program, and can be reasonably considered independent and separate
works in themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply to those sections when you
distribute them as separate works. But when you distribute the same sections as part of a whole
which is a work based on the Program, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of this
License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to the entire whole, and thus to each and
every part regardless of who wrote it.
Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work written entirely
by you; rather, the intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or collective
works based on the Program.
A-2
Software License Notice
In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Program with the Program (or with
a work based on the Program) on a volume of a storage or distribution medium does not bring the
other work under the scope of this License.
3. You may copy and distribute the Program (or a work based on it, under Section 2) in object
code or executable form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you also do
one of the following:
a) Accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable source code, which must
be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for
software interchange; or,
b) Accompany it with a written offer, valid for at least three years, to give any third party, for a
charge no more than your cost of physically performing source distribution, a complete
machine-readable copy of the corresponding source code, to be distributed under the terms
of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange; or,
c) Accompany it with the information you received as to the offer to distribute corresponding
source code.
(This alternative is allowed only for noncommercial distribution and only if you received the
program in object code or executable form with such an offer, in accord with Subsection b
above.)
4. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Program except as expressly provided
under this License. Any attempt otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the
Program is void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License. However,
parties who have received copies, or rights, from you under this License will not have their
licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance.
Software License Notice
If distribution of executable or object code is made by offering access to copy from a designated
place, then offering equivalent access to copy the source code from the same place counts as
distribution of the source code, even though third parties are not compelled to copy the source
along with the object code.
Appendix
The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it.
For an executable work, complete source code means all the source code for all modules it
contains, plus any associated interface definition files, plus the scripts used to control compilation
and installation of the executable.
However, as a special exception, the source code distributed need not include anything that is
normally distributed (in either source or binary form) with the major components (compiler, kernel,
and so on) of the operating system on which the executable runs, unless that component itself
accompanies the executable.
5. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not signed it. However, nothing
else grants you permission to modify or distribute the Program or its derivative works. These
actions are prohibited by law if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by modifying or
distributing the Program (or any work based on the Program), you indicate your acceptance of
this License to do so, and all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying the
Program or works based on it.
6. Each time you redistribute the Program (or any work based on the Program), the recipient
automatically receives a license from the original licensor to copy, distribute or modify the
Program subject to these terms and conditions. You may not impose any further restrictions
on the recipients’ exercise of the rights granted herein. You are not responsible for enforcing
compliance by third parties to this License.
A-3
Software License Notice
7. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or for any other
reason (not limited to patent issues), conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order,
agreement or otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not excuse you
from the conditions of this License. If you cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your
obligations under this License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you
may not distribute the Program at all. For example, if a patent license would not permit royaltyfree redistribution of the Program by all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through
you, then the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to refrain entirely
from distribution of the Program.
If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular circumstance, the
balance of the section is intended to apply and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other
circumstances.
It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other property right
claims or to contest validity of any such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the
integrity of the free software distribution system, which is implemented by public license practices.
Many people have made generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed through
that system in reliance on consistent application of that system; it is up to the author/donor to
decide if he or she is willing to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot
impose that choice.
This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence of the rest
of this License.
8. If the distribution and/or use of the Program is restricted in certain countries either by patents
or by copyrighted interfaces, the original copyright holder who places the Program under this
License may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding those countries, so
that distribution is permitted only in or among countries not thus excluded. In such case, this
License incorporates the limitation as if written in the body of this License.
9. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of the General Public
License from time to time. Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but
may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns.
Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Program specifies a version number
of this License which applies to it and “any later version”, you have the option of following the
terms and conditions either of that version or of any later version published by the Free Software
Foundation. If the Program does not specify a version number of this License, you may choose
any version ever published by the Free Software Foundation.
10. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other free programs whose distribution
conditions are different, write to the author to ask for permission.
For software which is copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation, write to the Free Software
Foundation; we sometimes make exceptions for this.
Our decision will be guided by the two goals of preserving the free status of all derivatives of
our free software and of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally.
A-4
Software License Notice
NO WARRANTY
11. BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY
FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT
WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER
PARTIES PROVIDE THE PROGRAM “AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS
WITH YOU. SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF
ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION.
12. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING
WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR
REDISTRIBUTE THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR
DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM
(INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED
INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF
THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER PROGRAMS), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER
OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
■ Preamble
Software License Notice
Version 2.1, February 1999
Copyright © 1991, 1999 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307 USA
Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document, but
changing it is not allowed.
[This is the first released version of the Lesser GPL. It also counts as the successor of the GNU
Library Public License, version 2, hence the version number 2.1.]
Appendix
GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change it. By
contrast, the GNU General Public Licenses are intended to guarantee your freedom to share and
change free software — to make sure the software is free for all its users.
This license, the Lesser General Public License, applies to some specially designated software
packages — typically libraries — of the Free Software Foundation and other authors who decide
to use it. You can use it too, but we suggest you first think carefully about whether this license or
the ordinary General Public License is the better strategy to use in any particular case, based on
the explanations below.
When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom of use, not price. Our General Public
Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free
software (and charge for this service if you wish); that you receive source code or can get it if you
want it; that you can change the software and use pieces of it in new free programs; and that you
are informed that you can do these things.
To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid distributors to deny you these rights
or to ask you to surrender these rights. These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for
you if you distribute copies of the library or if you modify it.
A-5
Software License Notice
For example, if you distribute copies of the library, whether gratis or for a fee, you must give the
recipients all the rights that we gave you. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get
the source code. If you link other code with the library, you must provide complete object files to
the recipients, so that they can relink them with the library after making changes to the library and
recompiling it. And you must show them these terms so they know their rights.
We protect your rights with a two-step method: (1) we copyright the library, and (2) we offer you
this license, which gives you legal permission to copy, distribute and/or modify the library.
To protect each distributor, we want to make it very clear that there is no warranty for the free
library. Also, if the library is modified by someone else and passed on, the recipients should know
that what they have is not the original version, so that the original author’s reputation will not be
affected by problems that might be introduced by others.
Finally, software patents pose a constant threat to the existence of any free program. We wish to
make sure that a company cannot effectively restrict the users of a free program by obtaining a
restrictive license from a patent holder. Therefore, we insist that any patent license obtained for a
version of the library must be consistent with the full freedom of use specified in this license.
Most GNU software, including some libraries, is covered by the ordinary GNU General Public
License. This license, the GNU Lesser General Public License, applies to certain designated
libraries, and is quite different from the ordinary General Public License. We use this license for
certain libraries in order to permit linking those libraries into non-free programs.
When a program is linked with a library, whether statically or using a shared library, the
combination of the two is legally speaking a combined work, a derivative of the original library. The
ordinary General Public License therefore permits such linking only if the entire combination fits its
criteria of freedom. The Lesser General Public License permits more lax criteria for linking other
code with the library.
We call this license the “Lesser” General Public License because it does Less to protect the user’s
freedom than the ordinary General Public License. It also provides other free software developers
Less of an advantage over competing non-free programs. These disadvantages are the reason
we use the ordinary General Public License for many libraries. However, the Lesser license
provides advantages in certain special circumstances.
For example, on rare occasions, there may be a special need to encourage the widest possible
use of a certain library, so that it becomes a de-facto standard. To achieve this, non-free programs
must be allowed to use the library. A more frequent case is that a free library does the same job as
widely used non-free libraries. In this case, there is little to gain by limiting the free library to free
software only, so we use the Lesser General Public License.
In other cases, permission to use a particular library in non-free programs enables a greater
number of people to use a large body of free software. For example, permission to use the GNU C
Library in non-free programs enables many more people to use the whole GNU operating system,
as well as its variant, the GNU/Linux operating system.
Although the Lesser General Public License is Less protective of the users’ freedom, it does
ensure that the user of a program that is linked with the Library has the freedom and the
wherewithal to run that program using a modified version of the Library.
The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification follow. Pay close
attention to the difference between a “work based on the library” and a “work that uses the library”.
The former contains code derived from the library, whereas the latter must be combined with the
library in order to run.
A-6
Software License Notice
GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION
AND MODIFICATION
0. This License Agreement applies to any software library or other program which contains a
notice placed by the copyright holder or other authorized party saying it may be distributed
under the terms of this Lesser General Public License (also called “this License”). Each
licensee is addressed as “you”.
A “library” means a collection of software functions and/or data prepared so as to be conveniently
linked with application programs (which use some of those functions and data) to form
executables.
The “Library”, below, refers to any such software library or work which has been distributed under
these terms. A “work based on the Library” means either the Library or any derivative work under
copyright law: that is to say, a work containing the Library or a portion of it, either verbatim or with
modifications and/or translated straightforwardly into another language. (Hereinafter, translation is
included without limitation in the term “modification”.)
“Source code” for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it. For a
library, complete source code means all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any
associated interface definition files, plus the scripts used to control compilation and installation of
the library.
You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and you may at your option offer
warranty protection in exchange for a fee.
Software License Notice
1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Library’s complete source code as you
receive it, in any medium, provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each
copy an appropriate copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the notices that
refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty; and distribute a copy of this License
along with the Library.
Appendix
Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not covered by this License; they
are outside its scope. The act of running a program using the Library is not restricted, and output
from such a program is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the Library
(independent of the use of the Library in a tool for writing it). Whether that is true depends on what
the Library does and what the program that uses the Library does.
2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Library or any portion of it, thus forming a work
based on the Library, and copy and distribute such modifications or work under the terms of
Section 1 above, provided that you also meet all of these conditions:
a) The modified work must itself be a software library.
b) You must cause the files modified to carry prominent notices stating that you changed the
files and the date of any change.
c) You must cause the whole of the work to be licensed at no charge to all third parties under
the terms of this License.
d) If a facility in the modified Library refers to a function or a table of data to be supplied by an
application program that uses the facility, other than as an argument passed when the
facility is invoked, then you must make a good faith effort to ensure that, in the event an
application does not supply such function or table, the facility still operates, and performs
whatever part of its purpose remains meaningful.
(For example, a function in a library to compute square roots has a purpose that is entirely
well-defined independent of the application. Therefore, Subsection 2d requires that any
application-supplied function or table used by this function must be optional: if the application
does not supply it, the square root function must still compute square roots.)
A-7
Software License Notice
These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If identifiable sections of that work are
not derived from the Library, and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works
in themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply to those sections when you distribute
them as separate works. But when you distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a
work based on the Library, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of this License,
whose permissions for other licensees extend to the entire whole, and thus to each and every part
regardless of who wrote it.
Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work written entirely
by you; rather, the intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or collective
works based on the Library.
In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Library with the Library (or with a
work based on the Library) on a volume of a storage or distribution medium does not bring the
other work under the scope of this License.
3. You may opt to apply the terms of the ordinary GNU General Public License instead of this
License to a given copy of the Library. To do this, you must alter all the notices that refer to
this License, so that they refer to the ordinary GNU General Public License, version 2, instead
of to this License. (If a newer version than version 2 of the ordinary GNU General Public
License has appeared, then you can specify that version instead if you wish.) Do not make
any other change in these notices.
Once this change is made in a given copy, it is irreversible for that copy, so the ordinary GNU
General Public License applies to all subsequent copies and derivative works made from that
copy.
This option is useful when you wish to copy part of the code of the Library into a program that is
not a library.
4. You may copy and distribute the Library (or a portion or derivative of it, under Section 2) in
object code or executable form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you
accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable source code, which must be
distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for
software interchange.
If distribution of object code is made by offering access to copy from a designated place, then
offering equivalent access to copy the source code from the same place satisfies the requirement
to distribute the source code, even though third parties are not compelled to copy the source along
with the object code.
5. A program that contains no derivative of any portion of the Library, but is designed to work with
the Library by being compiled or linked with it, is called a “work that uses the Library”. Such a
work, in isolation, is not a derivative work of the Library, and therefore falls outside the scope
of this License.
However, linking a “work that uses the Library” with the Library creates an executable that is a
derivative of the Library (because it contains portions of the Library), rather than a “work that uses
the library”. The executable is therefore covered by this License. Section 6 states terms for
distribution of such executables.
When a “work that uses the Library” uses material from a header file that is part of the Library, the
object code for the work may be a derivative work of the Library even though the source code is
not. Whether this is true is especially significant if the work can be linked without the Library, or if
the work is itself a library. The threshold for this to be true is not precisely defined by law.
If such an object file uses only numerical parameters, data structure layouts and accessors, and
small macros and small inline functions (ten lines or less in length), then the use of the object file
is unrestricted, regardless of whether it is legally a derivative work. (Executables containing this
object code plus portions of the Library will still fall under Section 6.)
A-8
Software License Notice
Otherwise, if the work is a derivative of the Library, you may distribute the object code for the work
under the terms of Section 6. Any executables containing that work also fall under Section 6,
whether or not they are linked directly with the Library itself.
6. As an exception to the Sections above, you may also combine or link a “work that uses the
Library” with the Library to produce a work containing portions of the Library, and distribute
that work under terms of your choice, provided that the terms permit modification of the work
for the customer’s own use and reverse engineering for debugging such modifications.
You must give prominent notice with each copy of the work that the Library is used in it and that
the Library and its use are covered by this License. You must supply a copy of this License. If the
work during execution displays copyright notices, you must include the copyright notice for the
Library among them, as well as a reference directing the user to the copy of this License.
Also, you must do one of these things:
a) Accompany the work with the complete corresponding machine-readable source code for
the Library including whatever changes were used in the work (which must be distributed
under Sections 1 and 2 above); and, if the work is an executable linked with the Library, with
the complete machine-readable “work that uses the Library”, as object code and/or source
code, so that the user can modify the Library and then relink to produce a modified
executable containing the modified Library. (It is understood that the user who changes the
contents of definitions files in the Library will not necessarily be able to recompile the
application to use the modified definitions.)
d) If distribution of the work is made by offering access to copy from a designated place, offer
equivalent access to copy the above specified materials from the same place.
e) Verify that the user has already received a copy of these materials or that you have already
sent this user a copy.
For an executable, the required form of the “work that uses the Library” must include any data and
utility programs needed for reproducing the executable from it.
However, as a special exception, the materials to be distributed need not include anything that is
normally distributed (in either source or binary form) with the major components (compiler, kernel,
and so on) of the operating system on which the executable runs, unless that component itself
accompanies the executable.
Software License Notice
c) Accompany the work with a written offer, valid for at least three years, to give the same user
the materials specified in Subsection 6a, above, for a charge no more than the cost of
performing this distribution.
Appendix
b) Use a suitable shared library mechanism for linking with the Library. A suitable mechanism
is one that (1) uses at run time a copy of the library already present on the user’s computer
system, rather than copying library functions into the executable, and (2) will operate
properly with a modified version of the library, if the user installs one, as long as the
modified version is interface-compatible with the version that the work was made with.
It may happen that this requirement contradicts the license restrictions of other proprietary
libraries that do not normally accompany the operating system. Such a contradiction means you
cannot use both them and the Library together in an executable that you distribute.
7. You may place library facilities that are a work based on the Library side-by-side in a single
library together with other library facilities not covered by this License, and distribute such a
combined library, provided that the separate distribution of the work based on the Library and
of the other library facilities is otherwise permitted, and provided that you do these two things:
a) Accompany the combined library with a copy of the same work based on the Library,
uncombined with any other library facilities. This must be distributed under the terms of the
Sections above.
b) Give prominent notice with the combined library of the fact that part of it is a work based on
the Library, and explaining where to find the accompanying uncombined form of the same
work.
A-9
Software License Notice
8. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, link with, or distribute the Library except as expressly
provided under this License. Any attempt otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense, link with, or
distribute the Library is void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License.
However, parties who have received copies, or rights, from you under this License will not
have their licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance.
9. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not signed it. However, nothing
else grants you permission to modify or distribute the Library or its derivative works. These
actions are prohibited by law if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by modifying or
distributing the Library (or any work based on the Library), you indicate your acceptance of this
License to do so, and all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying the
Library or works based on it.
10. Each time you redistribute the Library (or any work based on the Library), the recipient
automatically receives a license from the original licensor to copy, distribute, link with or
modify the Library subject to these terms and conditions. You may not impose any further
restrictions on the recipients’ exercise of the rights granted herein. You are not responsible for
enforcing compliance by third parties with this License.
11. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or for any other
reason (not limited to patent issues), conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order,
agreement or otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not excuse you
from the conditions of this License. If you cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your
obligations under this License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you
may not distribute the Library at all. For example, if a patent license would not permit royaltyfree redistribution of the Library by all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through
you, then the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to refrain entirely
from distribution of the Library.
If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular circumstance, the
balance of the section is intended to apply, and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other
circumstances.
It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other property right
claims or to contest validity of any such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the
integrity of the free software distribution system which is implemented by public license practices.
Many people have made generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed through
that system in reliance on consistent application of that system; it is up to the author/donor to
decide if he or she is willing to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot
impose that choice.
This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence of the rest
of this License.
12. If the distribution and/or use of the Library is restricted in certain countries either by patents or
by copyrighted interfaces, the original copyright holder who places the Library under this
License may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding those countries, so
that distribution is permitted only in or among countries not thus excluded. In such case, this
License incorporates the limitation as if written in the body of this License.
13. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of the Lesser
General Public License from time to time. Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the
present version, but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns.
Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Library specifies a version number of
this License which applies to it and “any later version”, you have the option of following the terms
and conditions either of that version or of any later version published by the Free Software
Foundation. If the Library does not specify a license version number, you may choose any version
ever published by the Free Software Foundation.
A-10
Software License Notice
14. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Library into other free programs whose distribution
conditions are incompatible with these, write to the author to ask for permission. For software
which is copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation, write to the Free Software Foundation;
we sometimes make exceptions for this. Our decision will be guided by the two goals of
preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and of promoting the sharing
and reuse of software generally.
NO WARRANTY
15. BECAUSE THE LIBRARY IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY
FOR THE LIBRARY, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT
WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER
PARTIES PROVIDE THE LIBRARY “AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER
EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE LIBRARY IS WITH
YOU. SHOULD THE LIBRARY PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL
NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION.
Copyright © 1998, 1999, 2000 Thai Open Source Software Center Ltd and Clark Cooper
Copyright © 2001, 2002, 2003 Expat maintainers.
Software License Notice
expat
Appendix
16. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING
WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR
REDISTRIBUTE THE LIBRARY AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR
DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE LIBRARY
(INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED
INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF
THE LIBRARY TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER SOFTWARE), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER
OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and
associated documentation files (the “Software”), to deal in the Software without restriction,
including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense,
and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do
so, subject to the following conditions:
The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial
portions of the Software.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED “AS IS”, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY,
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT.
IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY
CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT
OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR
THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
A-11
Software License Notice
glibc
This file contains the copying permission notices for various files in the GNU C Library distribution
that have copyright owners other than the Free Software Foundation. These notices all require
that a copy of the notice be included in the accompanying documentation and be distributed with
binary distributions of the code, so be sure to include this file along with any binary distributions
derived from the GNU C Library.
All code incorporated from 4.4 BSD is distributed under the following license:
Copyright © 1991 Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted
provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions
and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions
and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the
distribution.
3. [This condition was removed.]
4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or
promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR
ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT,
STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY
WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
SUCH DAMAGE.
The DNS resolver code, taken from BIND 4.9.5, is copyrighted both by UC Berkeley and by Digital
Equipment Corporation. The DEC portions are under the following license:
Portions Copyright © 1993 by Digital Equipment Corporation.
Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software for any purpose with or without fee is
hereby granted, provided that the above copyright notice and this permission notice appear in all
copies, and that the name of Digital Equipment Corporation not be used in advertising or publicity
pertaining to distribution of the document or software without specific, written prior permission.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED “AS IS” AND DIGITAL EQUIPMENT CORP. DISCLAIMS ALL
WARRANTIES WITH REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE, INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS. IN NO EVENT SHALL DIGITAL
EQUIPMENT CORPORATION BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS
OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE OR
OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR
PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE.
The Sun RPC support (from rpcsrc-4.0) is covered by the following license:
Copyright © 1984, Sun Microsystems, Inc.
A-12
Software License Notice
Sun RPC is a product of Sun Microsystems, Inc. and is provided for unrestricted use provided that
this legend is included on all tape media and as a part of the software program in whole or part.
Users may copy or modify Sun RPC without charge, but are not authorized to license or distribute
it to anyone else except as part of a product or program developed by the user.
SUN RPC IS PROVIDED AS IS WITH NO WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND INCLUDING THE
WARRANTIES OF DESIGN, MERCHANTIBILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE, OR ARISING FROM A COURSE OF DEALING, USAGE OR TRADE PRACTICE.
Sun RPC is provided with no support and without any obligation on the part of Sun Microsystems,
Inc. to assist in its use, correction, modification or enhancement.
SUN MICROSYSTEMS, INC. SHALL HAVE NO LIABILITY WITH RESPECT TO THE
INFRINGEMENT OF COPYRIGHTS, TRADE SECRETS OR ANY PATENTS BY SUN RPC OR
ANY PART THEREOF.
In no event will Sun Microsystems, Inc. be liable for any lost revenue or profits or other special,
indirect and consequential damages, even if Sun has been advised of the possibility of such
damages.
The following CMU license covers some of the support code for Mach, derived from Mach 3.0:
Mach Operating System
Copyright © 1991, 1990, 1989 Carnegie Mellon University All Rights Reserved.
Permission to use, copy, modify and distribute this software and its documentation is hereby
granted, provided that both the copyright notice and this permission notice appear in all copies of
the software, derivative works or modified versions, and any portions thereof, and that both
notices appear in supporting documentation.
Software Distribution Coordinator
School of Computer Science
Carnegie Mellon University
Pittsburgh PA 15213-3890
or [email protected] any improvements or extensions that they make and
grant Carnegie Mellon the rights to redistribute these changes.
Software License Notice
Carnegie Mellon requests users of this software to return to
Appendix
CARNEGIE MELLON ALLOWS FREE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE IN ITS “AS IS” CONDITION.
CARNEGIE MELLON DISCLAIMS ANY LIABILITY OF ANY KIND FOR ANY DAMAGES
WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE.
The file if_ppp.h is under the following CMU license:
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted
provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions
and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions
and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the
distribution.
3. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or
promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.
A-13
Software License Notice
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY CARNEGIE MELLON UNIVERSITY AND
CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT
NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE UNIVERSITY OR
CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR
PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF
LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING
NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
The following license covers the files from Intel’s “Highly Optimized Mathematical Functions for
Itanium” collection:
Intel License Agreement
Copyright © 2000, Intel Corporation
All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted
provided that the following conditions are met:
* Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and
the following disclaimer.
* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions
and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the
distribution.
* The name of Intel Corporation may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from
this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS “AS
IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL INTEL OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT,
STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY
WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
SUCH DAMAGE.
The files inet/getnameinfo.c and sysdeps/posix/getaddrinfo.c are copyright © by Craig Metz and
are distributed under the following license:
The Inner Net License, Version 2.00
The author(s) grant permission for redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or
without modification, of the software and documentation provided that the following conditions are
met:
0. If you receive a version of the software that is specifically labelled as not being for
redistribution (check the version message and/or README), you are not permitted to
redistribute that version of the software in any way or form.
1. All terms of the all other applicable copyrights and licenses must be followed.
2. Redistributions of source code must retain the authors’ copyright notice(s), this list of
conditions, and the following disclaimer.
A-14
Software License Notice
3. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the authors’ copyright notice(s), this list of
conditions, and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided
with the distribution.
4. [The copyright holder has authorized the removal of this clause.]
5. Neither the name(s) of the author(s) nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse
or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ITS AUTHORS AND CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR
ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT,
STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY
WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
SUCH DAMAGE.
If these license terms cause you a real problem, contact the author.
libcap
1. Redistributions of source code must retain any existing copyright notice, and this entire
permission notice in its entirety, including the disclaimer of warranties.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce all prior and current copyright notices, this list of
conditions, and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided
with the distribution.
3. The name of any author may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this
software without their specific prior written permission.
Software License Notice
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms of libcap, with or without modification, are
permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
Appendix
Unless otherwise *explicitly* stated, the following text describes the licensed conditions under
which the contents of this libcap release may be used and distributed:
ALTERNATIVELY, this product may be distributed under the terms of the GNU General Public
License, in which case the provisions of the GNU GPL are required INSTEAD OF the above
restrictions. (This clause is necessary due to a potential conflict between the GNU GPL and the
restrictions contained in a BSD-style copyright.)
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY
AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED.
IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR(S) BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT,
INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT
NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE,
DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY
THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF
THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
A-15
Software License Notice
ntp
Copyright Notice
jpg “Clone me,” says Dolly sheepishly
Last update: 02:45 UTC Tuesday, June 27, 2006
The following copyright notice applies to all files collectively called the Network Time Protocol
Version 4 Distribution. Unless specifically declared otherwise in an individual file, this notice
applies as if the text was explicitly included in the file.
Copyright © David L. Mills 1992-2006
Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its documentation for any
purpose with or without fee is hereby granted, provided that the above copyright notice appears in
all copies and that both the copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting
documentation, and that the name University of Delaware not be used in advertising or publicity
pertaining to distribution of the software without specific, written prior permission. The University of
Delaware makes no representations about the suitability this software for any purpose. It is
provided “as is” without express or implied warranty.
openldap
The OpenLDAP Public License
Version 2.8, 17 August 2003
Redistribution and use of this software and associated documentation (“Software”), with or without
modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions in source form must retain copyright statements and notices,
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce applicable copyright statements and notices,
this list of conditions, and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials
provided with the distribution, and
3. Redistributions must contain a verbatim copy of this document.
The OpenLDAP Foundation may revise this license from time to time. Each revision is
distinguished by a version number. You may use this Software under terms of this license revision
or under the terms of any subsequent revision of the license.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OPENLDAP FOUNDATION AND ITS
CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING,
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OPENLDAP
FOUNDATION, ITS CONTRIBUTORS, OR THE AUTHOR(S) OR OWNER(S) OF THE
SOFTWARE BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY,
OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF
SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN
CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)
ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
The names of the authors and copyright holders must not be used in advertising or otherwise to
promote the sale, use or other dealing in this Software without specific, written prior permission.
Title to copyright in this Software shall at all times remain with copyright holders.
A-16
Software License Notice
OpenLDAP is a registered trademark of the OpenLDAP Foundation.
Copyright 1999-2003 The OpenLDAP Foundation, Redwood City, California, USA. All Rights
Reserved. Permission to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this document is granted.
openssl
LICENSE ISSUES
The OpenSSL toolkit stays under a dual license, i.e. both the conditions of the OpenSSL License
and the original SSLeay license apply to the toolkit.
See below for the actual license texts. Actually both licenses are BSD-style Open Source licenses.
In case of any license issues related to OpenSSL please contact [email protected]
OpenSSL License
Copyright © 1998-2006 The OpenSSL Project. All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted
provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions
and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions
and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the
distribution.
5. Products derived from this software may not be called “OpenSSL” nor may “OpenSSL” appear
in their names without prior written permission of the OpenSSL Project.
6. Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following acknowledgment:
“This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL
Toolkit. (http://www.openssl.org/)”
Software License Notice
4. The names “OpenSSL Toolkit” and “OpenSSL Project” must not be used to endorse or
promote products derived from this software without prior written permission. For written
permission, please contact [email protected]
Appendix
3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following
acknowledgment:
“This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL
Toolkit. (http://www.openssl.org/)”
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESSED
OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE
LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF
SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN
CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)
ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young ([email protected]).
This product includes software written by Tim Hudson ([email protected]).
A-17
Software License Notice
Original SSLeay License
Copyright © 1995-1998 Eric Young ([email protected]) All rights reserved.
This package is an SSL implementation written by Eric Young ([email protected]).
The implementation was written so as to conform with Netscapes SSL.
This library is free for commercial and non-commercial use as long as the following conditions are
aheared to. The following conditions apply to all code found in this distribution, be it the RC4, RSA,
lhash, DES, etc., code; not just the SSL code. The SSL documentation included with this
distribution is covered by the same copyright terms except that the holder is Tim Hudson
([email protected]).
Copyright remains Eric Young’s, and as such any Copyright notices in the code are not to be
removed.
If this package is used in a product, Eric Young should be given attribution as the author of the
parts of the library used.
This can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or in documentation (online or
textual) provided with the package.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted
provided that the following conditions are met:
7. Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer.
8. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions
and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the
distribution.
9. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following
acknowledgement:
“This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young ([email protected])”
The word ‘cryptographic’ can be left out if the routines from the library being used are not
cryptographic related :-).
10. If you include any Windows specific code (or a derivative thereof) from the apps directory
(application code) you must include an acknowledgement:
“This product includes software written by Tim Hudson ([email protected])”
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN
NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT,
INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR
SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER
CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGE.
The license and distribution terms for any publically available version or derivative of this code
cannot be changed.
i.e. this code cannot simply be copied and put under another distribution license
[including the GNU Public License.]
A-18
Software License Notice
pam
Unless otherwise *explicitly* stated the following text describes the licensed conditions under
which the contents of this Linux-PAM release may be distributed:
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms of Linux-PAM, with or without modification, are
permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain any existing copyright notice, and this entire
permission notice in its entirety, including the disclaimer of warranties.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce all prior and current copyright notices, this list of
conditions, and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided
with the distribution.
3. The name of any author may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this
software without their specific prior written permission.
ALTERNATIVELY, this product may be distributed under the terms of the GNU General Public
License, in which case the provisions of the GNU GPL are required INSTEAD OF the above
restrictions. (This clause is necessary due to a potential conflict between the GNU GPL and the
restrictions contained in a BSD-style copyright.)
This is version 2005-Feb-10 of the Info-ZIP copyright and license.
The definitive version of this document should be available at
ftp://ftp.info-zip.org/pub/infozip/license.html indefinitely.
Software License Notice
unzip
Appendix
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY
AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED.
IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR(S) BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT,
INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT
NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE,
DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY
THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF
THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
Copyright © 1990-2005 Info-ZIP. All rights reserved.
For the purposes of this copyright and license, “Info-ZIP” is defined as the following set of
individuals:
Mark Adler, John Bush, Karl Davis, Harald Denker, Jean-Michel Dubois, Jean-loup Gailly,
Hunter Goatley, Ed Gordon, Ian Gorman, Chris Herborth, Dirk Haase, Greg Hartwig,
Robert Heath, Jonathan Hudson, Paul Kienitz, David Kirschbaum, Johnny Lee, Onno van
der Linden, Igor Mandrichenko, Steve P. Miller, Sergio Monesi, Keith Owens, George
Petrov, Greg Roelofs, Kai Uwe Rommel, Steve Salisbury, Dave Smith, Steven M.
Schweda, Christian Spieler, Cosmin Truta, Antoine Verheijen, Paul von Behren, Rich
Wales, Mike White
This software is provided “as is,” without warranty of any kind, express or implied. In no event shall
Info-ZIP or its contributors be held liable for any direct, indirect, incidental, special or
consequential damages arising out of the use of or inability to use this software.
Permission is granted to anyone to use this software for any purpose, including commercial
applications, and to alter it and redistribute it freely, subject to the following restrictions:
A-19
Software License Notice
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, definition, disclaimer,
and this list of conditions.
2. Redistributions in binary form (compiled executables) must reproduce the above copyright
notice, definition, disclaimer, and this list of conditions in documentation and/or other materials
provided with the distribution. The sole exception to this condition is redistribution of a
standard UnZipSFX binary (including SFXWiz) as part of a self-extracting archive; that is
permitted without inclusion of this license, as long as the normal SFX banner has not been
removed from the binary or disabled.
3. Altered versions — including, but not limited to, ports to new operating systems, existing ports
with new graphical interfaces, and dynamic, shared, or static library versions — must be
plainly marked as such and must not be misrepresented as being the original source. Such
altered versions also must not be misrepresented as being Info-ZIP releases — including, but
not limited to, labeling of the altered versions with the names “Info-ZIP” (or any variation
thereof, including, but not limited to, different capitalizations), “Pocket UnZip,” “WiZ” or
“MacZip” without the explicit permission of Info-ZIP. Such altered versions are further
prohibited from misrepresentative use of the Zip-Bugs or Info-ZIP e-mail addresses or of the
Info-ZIP URL(s).
4. Info-ZIP retains the right to use the names “Info-ZIP,” “Zip,” “UnZip,” “UnZipSFX,” “WiZ,”
“Pocket UnZip,” “Pocket Zip,” and “MacZip” for its own source and binary releases.
zlib
© 1995-2004 Jean-loup Gailly and Mark Adler
This software is provided ‘as-is’, without any express or implied warranty. In no event will the
authors be held liable for any damages arising from the use of this software.
Permission is granted to anyone to use this software for any purpose, including commercial
applications, and to alter it and redistribute it freely, subject to the following restrictions:
1. The origin of this software must not be misrepresented; you must not claim that you wrote the
original software. If you use this software in a product, an acknowledgment in the product
documentation would be appreciated but is not required.
2. Altered source versions must be plainly marked as such, and must not be misrepresented as
being the original software.
3. This notice may not be removed or altered from any source distribution.
Jean-loup Gailly
[email protected]
Mark Adler
[email protected]
If you use the zlib library in a product, we would appreciate *not* receiving lengthy legal
documents to sign. The sources are provided for free but without warranty of any kind. The library
has been entirely written by Jean-loup Gailly and Mark Adler; it does not include third-party code.
If you redistribute modified sources, we would appreciate that you include in the file ChangeLog
history information documenting your changes. Please read the FAQ for more information on the
distribution of modified source versions.
A-20
MIDI Data Format
If you are familiar with MIDI, or are using a computer to control your music software with computergenerated MIDI messages, the data provided in this section can help you to control your Disklavier.
Messages include those that can be received by the piano part and/or those that can be received by an
ESBL part. Messages that can be transmitted as well as received are shown as “transmitted.”
1.
CHANNEL MESSAGES
1.1
Key On / Key Off
Cntrl#
64
(Piano Part, ESBL Part) (transmitted)
Piano Part reception note range = A-1~C7 : C3=60
ESBL part reception note range = C-2~G8
Velocity range = 1~127 (Only the Key On velocity is received)
1.2
1.2.1
Bank Select
Cntrl#
0
32
Parameter
Bank Select MSB
Bank Select LSB
Data Range
0...127
1.2.11 Soft Pedal
(Piano Part, ESBL Part) (transmitted)
Cntrl#
Parameter
Data Range
67
Soft Pedal
0...127
(0-63:off, 64-127:on)
1.2.12 Harmonic Content
(ESBL Part)
Messages which adjust the resonance set for each Voice.
Cntrl#
71
Parameter
Harmonic Content
Data Range
0...127
(0:-64, 64:+0, 127:+63)
Depending on the Voice, the effective range may be narrower
than the range available for adjustment.
1.2.13 Release Time
Data Range
0...127
Messages which adjust the envelope release time set for each
Voice.
Cntrl#
72
Parameter
Release Time
Data Range
0...127
(0:-64, 64:+0, 127:+63)
1.2.14 Attack Time
(ESBL Part)
(ESBL Part)
Messages which adjust the envelope attack time set for each
Voice.
Messages which set the value for the parameter specified by
RPN/NRPN.
Cntrl#
73
Data Entry
Cntrl#
6
38
Parameter
Data Entry MSB
Data Entry LSB
Data Range
0...127
0...127
Parameter value is determined by combining MSB and LSB.
Main Volume
(Piano Part, ESBL Part) (transmitted)
Cntrl#
7
Parameter
Main Volume
Data Range
0...127
Cntrl#
10
Data Range
0...127
(0:-64, 64:+0, 127:+63)
1.2.15 Brightness
(ESBL Part)
Messages which adjust the filter cutoff frequency set for each
Voice.
Cntrl#
74
Parameter
Brightness
Data Range
0...127
(0:-64, 64:+0, 127:+63)
(ESBL Part)
Parameter
Pan
Data Range
0...127
(Piano Part, ESBL Part)
Parameter
Expression
Messages which apply a portamento between the currentlysounding note and the subsequent note.
Cntrl#
84
Expression
Cntrl#
11
Parameter
Attack Time
1.2.16 Portamento Control
Pan
(ESBL Part)
1.2.8
Data Range
0...127
(0-63:off, 64-127:on)
MIDI Data Format
Parameter
Portamento Time
When the parameter 1.2.9 Portamento = ON, values will adjust
the speed of pitch change.
A setting of 0 - minimum portamento time, and 127 - maximum
portamento time.
1.2.7
Parameter
Sostenuto
(ESBL Part)
Portamento Time
Cntrl#
5
Cntrl#
66
Appendix
Parameter
Modulation
(ESBL Part)
1.2.6
Data Range
0...127
(0-63:off, 64-127:on)
Higher values will result in a more characteristic, resonant sound.
Modulation
Cntrl#
1
1.2.5
Cntrl#
65
(Piano Part, ESBL Part) (transmitted)
Data Range
0: Normal,
63: User voice,
64: SFX,
126: SFX kit,
127: Drum
0...127
(ESBL Part)
1.2.4
Parameter
Portamento
Portamento
(ESBL Part)
1.2.10 Sostenuto
You can select the Voice banks with MSB and LSB numbers.
MSB and LSB functions differently depending on the play mode.
In XG mode, MSB numbers select Voice type (Normal Voice or
Drum Voice), and LSB number select Voice banks.
In TG300B mode, LSB is fixed, and MSB numbers select Voice
banks.
(See Normal Voice List Drum Voice List.)
A new bank selection will not become effective until the next
Program Change message is received.
1.2.3
Data Range
0...127
(0-63:off, 64-127:on)
Control Change
(ESBL Part) (transmitted)
1.2.2
1.2.9
Parameter
Hold1
Data Range
0...127
Hold1
(Piano Part, ESBL Part) (transmitted)
Parameter
Portamento Control
Data Range
0...127
1.2.17 Effect1 Depth (Reverb Send Level)
(ESBL Part)
Cntrl#
91
Parameter
Effect1 Depth
Data Range
0...127
A-21
MIDI Data Format
1.2.18 Effect3 Depth (Chorus Send Level)
$1D
$rr
$mm
$1E
$rr
$mm
$1F
$rr
$mm
(ESBL Part)
Cntrl#
93
Parameter
Effect3 Depth
Data Range
0...127
1.2.19 Effect4 Depth (Variation Effect Send Level)
(ESBL Part)
Cntrl#
94
Parameter
Effect4 Depth
Data Range
0...127
1.2.20 Data Increment / Decrement (for RPN)
(ESBL Part)
Cntrl#
96
97
Parameter
RPN Increment
RPN Decrement
Data Range
0...127
0...127
1.2.21 NRPN (Non-Registered Parameter Number)
(ESBL Part)
Cntrl#
98
99
Parameter
NRPN LSB
NRPN MSB
Data Range
0...127
0...127
First send the NRPN MSB and NRPN LSB to specify the
parameter which is to be controlled. Then use Data Entry to set
the value of the specified parameter.
* Note that once the NRPN has been set for a channel subsequent
data entry will be recognized as the same NRPN’s value change.
Therefore, after you use the NRPN, you should set a Null (7FH,
7FH) value to avoid an unexpected result.
The following NRPN number can be received.
NRPN
MSB LSB
$01
$08
$01
$09
$01
$0A
$01
$20
$01
$21
$01
$63
$01
$64
$01
$66
$14
$rr
$15
$rr
$16
$rr
$17
A-22
$rr
$18
$rr
$19
$rr
$1A
$rr
$1C
$rr
Data entry
MSB
PARAMETER NAME and VALUE
RANGE
$mm
Vibrato Rate
mm : $00 - $40 - $7F (-64 - 0 - +63)
$mm
Vibrato Depth
mm : $00 - $40 - $7F (-64 - 0 - +63)
$mm
Vibrato Delay
mm : $00 - $40 - $7F (-64 - 0 - +63)
$mm
Filter Cutoff Frequency
mm : $00 - $40 - $7F (-64 - 0 - +63)
$mm
Filter Resonance
mm : $00 - $40 - $7F (-64 - 0 - +63)
$mm
EG Attack Time
mm : $00 - $40 - $7F (-64 - 0 - +63)
$mm
EG Decay Time
mm : $00 - $40 - $7F (-64 - 0 - +63)
$mm
EG Release Time
mm : $00 - $40 - $7F (-64 - 0 - +63)
$mm
Drum Filter Cutoff Frequency
mm : $00 - $40 - $7F (-64 - 0 - +63)
rr : drum instrument note number
$mm
Drum Filter Resonance
mm : $00 - $40 - $7F (-64 - 0 - +63)
rr : drum instrument note number
$mm
Drum EG Attack
mm : $00 - $40 - $7F (-64 - 0 - +63)
rr : drum instrument note number
$mm
Drum EG Decay Rate
mm : $00 - $40 - $7F (-64 - 0 - +63)
rr : drum instrument note number
Applies to both Decay1 and 2.
$mm
Drum Instrument Pitch Coarse
mm : $00 - $40 - $7F (-64 - 0 - +63)
rr : drum instrument note number
$mm
Drum Instrument Pitch Fine
mm : $00 - $40 - $7F (-64 - 0 - +63)
rr : drum instrument note number
$mm
Drum Instrument Level
mm : $00 - $7F (0 - max)
rr : drum instrument note number
$mm
Drum Instrument Pan
mm : $00 - $40 - $7F (random, left center - right)
rr : drum instrument note number
Drum Instrument Reverb Send Level
mm : $00 - $7F (0 -max)
rr : drum instrument note number
Drum Instrument Chorus Send Level
mm : $00 - $7F (0 - max)
rr : drum instrument note number
Drum Instrument Variation Send
Level
mm : $00 - $7F (0 - max)
rr : drum instrument note number
MSB 14H- 1FH (for Drum) is valid only if the Multi Part
parameter PART MODE = DRUMS 1 or DRUMS2 for that
channel. (If PART MODE = DRUM, no values will be changed.)
1.2.22 RPN (Registered Parameter Number)
(ESBL Part)
Cntrl#
100
101
Parameter
RPN LSB
RPN MSB
Data Range
0...127
0...127
The following RPN numbers can be received.
RPN Data entry
MSB LSB MSB LSB PARAMETER NAME and VALUE
RANGE
00H 00H mmH — Pitch Bend Sensitivity
mm:00-18H (0-24 chromatic steps)
Assignable in chromatic steps up to 2
octaves
Default : 02H
LSB value is ignored.
00H 01H mmH 11H Fine Tuning
mm: 00H-40H-7FH (-64-0-+63)
00H 02H mmH — Coarse Tuning
mm: 28H - 40H - 58H (-24 - +24
chromatic steps)
LSB value is ignored.
7FH 7FH —
— RPN null
Cancels RPN and NRPN numbers
1.2.23 Channel Mode Messages
The following Channel Mode Messages can be received.
2nd byte
120
121
123
124
125
126
127
1.2.23.1
3rd byte
0
0
0
0
0
0 ~ 16
0
All Sound Off
Reset All Controllers
All Note Off
Omni Off
Omni On
Mono
Poly
All Sound Off
(Piano Part, ESBL Part) (transmitted)
ESBL part;
Terminates all sounds currently sounding on the specified
channel. However, the status of channel messages such as
Note On and Hold On is maintained.
Piano Part;
The status of channel messages is not maintained.
1.2.23.2
Reset All Controllers
(ESBL Part)
The values of the following controllers will be reset to the
defaults.
CONTROLLER
Pitch Bend Change
Channel Aftertouch
Polyphonic Aftertouch
Modulation
Expression
Hold l
Portamento
Sostenuto
Soft Pedal
VALUE
±O (center)
0 (off)
0 (off)
0 (off)
127 (max)
0 (off)
0 (off)
0 (off)
0 (off)
MIDI Data Format
Portamento Control
RPN
NRPN
1.2.23.3
cancels the Portamento Source Key
Number that was received
number not specified; internal data
will not change
number not specified; internal data
will not change
All Note Off
(Piano Part, ESBL Part) (transmitted)
[OTHER]
1) Master tuning
2) TG300 System Data Parameter change
3) TG300 Multi Effect Data parameter change
4) TG300 Multi Part Data parameter change
2.1.2
2.1.2.1
11110000
01111111
01111111
00000100
00000001
0sssssss
0ttttttt
11110111
or
11110000
01111111
0xxxnnnn
00000100
00000001
0sssssss
0ttttttt
11110111
Omni Off
(Piano Part, ESBL Part)
Performs the same function as when an All Notes Off message is
received.
1.2.23.5
Omni On
(Piano Part, ESBL Part)
Performs the same function as when an All Notes Off message is
received.
1.2.23.6
Mono
(Piano Part, ESBL Part)
Performs the same function as when an All Sounds on message is
received, and if the 3rd byte (mono number) is in the range of 0 16, sets the corresponding channel to Mono Mode (Mode 4 : m =
1).
1.2.23.7
Poly
2.1.3
2.1.3.1
(ESBL Part) (transmitted)
Messages for Voice selection.
With a combination of Bank Select, you can select not only basic
Voice numbers, but also variation Voice bank numbers.
Pitch Bend
(ESBL Part)
When Multi Part Parameter Rcv PITCH BEND CHANGE=OFF,
pitch bend for that part is not received.
1.6
Polyphonic Aftertouch
F0
7E
7F
09
01
F7
= Exclusive status
= Universal Non-Real Time
= ID of target device
= Sub-ID #1=General MIDI Message
= Sub-ID #2=General MIDI On
= End of Exclusive
F0
7E
XN
09
01
F7
= Exclusive status
= Universal Non-Real Time
= Device Number, xxx = don’t care
= Sub-ID #1=General MIDI Message
= Sub-ID #2=General MIDI On
= End of Exclusive
When General MIDI Mode On is received. the play mode will be
changed to XG mode.
When this happens, the ESBL part will receive the MIDI
messages which compatible with GM System Level 1, and
consequently will not receive NRPN and Bank Select messages.
Since approximately 50ms is required to execute this messag, be
sure to leave an appropriate interval before the subsequent
message.
(ESBL Part)
(ESBL Part) (PianoPart) (transmitted)
Applying further pressure on the key does not output “key
aftertouch” information. Instead, key position is transmitted as
additional information.
General MIDI Mode On
MIDI Data Format
Program Change
Channel Aftertouch
= Exclusive status
= Universal Real Time
= Device Number, xxx = don’t care
= Sub-ID #1=Device Control Message
= Sub-ID #2=Master Volume
= Volume LSB
= Volume MSB
= End of Exclusive
Appendix
0;Off Disklavier keyboard does not play the internal voices.
127;On
1.5
F0
7F
XN
04
01
SS
TT
F7
Universal Non-Realtime Messages
11110000
01111110
01111111
00001001
00000001
11110111
or
11110000
01111110
0xxxnnnn
00001001
00000001
11110111
(Piano Part, ESBL Part)
1.4
= Exclusive status
= Universal Real Time
= ID of target device
= Sub-ID #1=Device Control Message
= Sub-ID #2=Master Volume
= Volume LSB
= Volume MSB
= End of Exclusive
(ESBL Part)
1.2.24 Local Control
1.3
F0
7F
7F
04
01
*SS
TT
F7
When received, the Volume MSB will be effective for the
System Parameter MASTER VOLUME.
* “SS” is the hexadecimal expression of Osssssss; same as for
“tt”, “aa”, etc.
(Piano Part, ESBL Part)
Performs the same function as when an All Sounds Off message
is received. and sets the corresponding channel to Poly Mode
(Mode 3).
Master Volume
(Piano Part, ESBL Part)
Terminates all notes currently on for the specified channel.
However, if Hold 1 or Sostenuto is on, notes will continue
sounding until these are turned off.
1.2.23.4
Universal Realtime Messages
2.1.4
XG Native Parameter Change
(ESBL Part)
2.
SYSTEM EXCLUSIVE MESSAGES
2.1
Parameter Change
The Disklavier receives the following parameter change
messages.
[UNIVERSAL REALTIME MESSAGE]
1) Master Volume
[UNIVERSAL NON REALTIME MESSAGE]
1) General MIDI Mode On
[XG NATIVE]
1) XG System on
2) XG System Data parameter change
3) Multi Effect1 Data parameter change
4) Multi Part Data parameter change
5) Drums Setup Data parameter change
With the Parameter Change messages as listed below, you can
change the characteristic of a Voice, such as by Effect Type or
effect parameter, transpose, tuning, and others.
11110000
01000011
0001nnnn
01001100
0aaaaaaa
0aaaaaaa
0aaaaaaa
0ddddddd
|
11110111
F0
43
1n
4C
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
ddddddd
|
F7
Exclusive status
YAMAHA ID
Device Number
XG Model ID
Address High
Address Mid
Address Low
Data
End of Exclusive
* Any number is OK since the device number for the Disklavier
is fixed to “All.”
A-23
MIDI Data Format
For parameters with data size of 2 or 4, transmit the appropriate
number of data bytes.
When sending the parameter change messages consecutively, be
sure to leave an appropriate interval (if the time base is 480. ca 5
unit) between the messages.
2.1.4.1
2.2.1
XG System On
(ESBL Part)
11110000
01000011
0001nnnn
01001100
0aaaaaaa
0aaaaaaa
0aaaaaaa
00000000
11110111
F0
43
1N
4C
00
00
7E
00
F7
Exclusive status
YAMAHA ID
Device Number
XG Model ID
Address High
Address Mid
Address Low
Data
End of Exclusive
When this data is received. the Disklavier will switch to XG
mode and all the parameters will be initialized accordingly, and
XG-compatible messages such as NRPN and Bank Select
messages can be received.
Since approximately 50ms is required to execute this message, be
sure to leave an appropriate interval before the subsequent
message
2.1.4.2
XG System Data parameter change
(ESBL Part)
2.2.1.1
Multi Effect1 Data parameter change
See tables <1-1> and <1-2>.
2.2.1.2
Multi Part Data parameter change
(ESBL Part)
See tables <1-1> and <1-4>.
2.2.1.4
2.2.2
Other parameter changes
Master Tuning
(ESBL Part)
F0
43
1n
27
30
00
00
mm
ll
cc
F7
Exclusive status
YAMAHA ID
Device Number
Model ID
Sub ID2
QS300 Native Bulk Dump
11110000
01000011
0000nnnn
01001101
0bbbbbbb
0bbbbbbb
0aaaaaaa
0aaaaaaa
0aaaaaaa
0ddddddd
|
|
0ccccccc
11110111
If a Drum Setup Reset parameter change message is received, the
Drum Setup parameter values will be initialized.
Selecting a Drum Set will cause the Drum Setup parameter
values to be initialized.
2.2.2.1
F0
43
0n
4B
bbbbbbb
bbbbbbb
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
dd
|
|
ccccccc
F7
Master Tune MSB
Master Tune LSB
End of Exclusive
Bulk Dump
(ESBL Part)
The Disklavier receives the following bulk dump data.
[XG NATIVE]
1) XG System Data
2) Multi Effect1 Data
3) Multi Part Data
4) Drums Setup Data
[QS300 NATIVE]
1) QS300 User Normal Voice Data
Exclusive status
YAMAHA ID
Device Number
QS300 Model ID
ByteCount
ByteCount
Address High
Address Mid
Address Low
Data
Checksum
End of Exclusive
QS300 User Normal Voice Data bulk damp
(ESBL Part)
This message simultaneously changes the pitch of all channels.
A-24
Drums Setup Data bulk dump
See tables <1-1> and <1-5>.
See tables <1-1> and <1-5>.
2.2
Multi Part Data bulk dump
(ESBL Part)
Drums Setup Data parameter change
11110000
01000011
0001nnnn
00100111
00110000
00000000
00000000
0mmmmmmm
0lllllll
0ccccccc
11110111
Multi Effect1 Data bulk dump
See tables <1-1> and <1-3>.
2.2.1.3
See tables <1-1> and <1-4>.
2.1.5.1
XG System Data bulk dump
(ESBL Part)
(ESBL Part)
2.1.5
Checksum
End of Exclusive
(ESBL Part)
See tables <1-1> and <1-3>.
2.1.4.5
Exclusive status
YAMAHA ID
Device Number
XG Model ID
ByteCount
ByteCount
Address High
Address Mid
Address Low
Data
(ESBL Part)
(ESBL Part)
2.1.4.4
F0
43
0n
4C
bbbbbbb
bbbbbbb
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
dd
|
|
ccccccc
F7
For the Address and Byte Count, refer to the supplementary
tables.
The Checksum is the value that results in a value of 0 for the
lower 7 bits when the Start Address, Byte Count, plus the
Checksum itself are added.
See tables <1-1> and <1-2>.
2.1.4.3
XG Native Bulk Dump
11110000
01000011
0000nnnn
01001100
0bbbbbbb
0bbbbbbb
0aaaaaaa
0aaaaaaa
0aaaaaaa
0ddddddd
|
|
0ccccccc
11110111
See tables <2-1> and <2-2>.
MIDI Data Format
3.
SYSTEM REALTIME MESSAGES
3.1
Active Sensing
a)
Transmission
Transmitted.
b)
Reception
Once FE has been received. if no MIDI data is subsequently
received for longer than an interval of approximately
300msec. the Disklavier will perform the same function as
when ALL SOUNDS OFF. ALL NOTES OFF, and RESET
ALL CONTROLLERS messages are received, and will then
return to a status in which FE is not monitored.
3.2
3.3
Start
a)
Transmission
This message is transmitted only when the REMOTE OUT
parameter is set to On.
b)
Reception
This message is received only when REMOTE IN Parameter
is Set to On.
Stop
a)
Transmission
This message is transmitted only when the REMOTE OUT
parameter is set to On.
b)
Reception
This message is received only when REMOTE IN Parameter
is Set to On.
<Table 1-1>
Parameter Bass Address
Model ID = 4C [XG]
Parameter Change
Address
(H) (M) (L)
Description
XG SYSTEM 00
00
00
System
00
00
7D
Drum setup Reset
00
00
7E
XG System On
00
00
7F
All Parameter Reset
EFFECT1
02
01
00 Effect1 (Reverb, Chorus, Variation)
MULTI PART 08
00
00
Multi Part 1
:
08
0F
00
Multi Part 16
DRUM
30
18
00
Drum Setup 1
30
18
00
Drum Setup 2
------->
Parameter
note number 13
note number 14
:
note number 91
n: Drum setup number (0, 1)
MIDI Parameter Change table (SYSTEM) [XG]
Address
(H)
00
00
00
04
05
06
7D
7E
7F
TOTAL SIZE
Size Data
(H) (H)
4
0000-07FF
Parameter
1
1
1
MASTER VOLUME
not used
TRANSPOSE
DRUM SETUP RESET
XG SYSTEM ON
ALL PARAMETER RESET
00 - 7F
00 - 7F
28 - 58
n
00
00
07
MASTER TUNE
Description
(H)
-102.4 - +102.3 [cent]
1st bit3-0→bit15-12
2nd bit3-0→bit11-8
3rd bit3-0→bit7-4
4th bit3-0→bit3-0
0 - 127
Default value
00 04 00 00
-400
MIDI Data Format
<Table 1-2>
Appendix
Address
0B
00
0C
00
:
3n
5B
00
3n
3n
7F
-24 - +24 [semitones]
n=Drum setup number
00=XG system ON (receive only)
00=ON (receive only)
40
Parameter
Description
REVERB TYPE MSB
REVERB TYPE LSB
REVERB PARAMETER 1
REVERB PARAMETER 2
REVERB PARAMETER 3
REVERB PARAMETER 4
REVERB PARAMETER 5
REVERB PARAMETER 6
REVERB PARAMETER 7
REVERB PARAMETER 8
REVERB PARAMETER 9
REVERB PARAMETER 10
REVERB RETURN
REVERB PAN
see Effect Type List
00 : basic type
see Effect Parameter List
”
”
”
”
”
”
”
”
”
-∞dB...0dB...+6dB(0...64...127)
L63...C...R63(1...64...127)
Default value
(H)
01(=HALL1)
00
Depends on reverb type
”
”
”
”
”
”
”
”
”
40
40
<Table 1-3>
MIDI Parameter Change table (EFFECT 1) [XG]
Address
(H)
02
01
00
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
0A
0B
0C
0D
Size Data
(H) (H)
2
00-7F
00-7F
1
00-7F
1
00-7F
1
00-7F
1
00-7F
1
00-7F
1
00-7F
1
00-7F
1
00-7F
1
00-7F
1
00-7F
1
00-7F
1
01-7F
A-25
MIDI Data Format
TOTAL SIZE
02
01
10
11
12
13
14
15
TOTAL SIZE
02
01
20
0E
1
1
1
1
1
1
6
2
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
2A
2B
2C
2D
2E
TOTAL SIZE
02
01
30
31
32
33
34
35
TOTAL SIZE
02
01
40
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0F
1
1
1
1
1
1
6
2
42
2
44
2
46
2
48
2
4A
2
4C
2
4E
2
50
2
52
2
54
2
56
57
58
59
5A
5B
1
1
1
1
1
1
5C
5D
5E
5F
60
TOTAL SIZE
02
01
70
71
72
73
74
75
TOTAL SIZE
A-26
1
1
1
1
1
21
1
1
1
1
1
1
6
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
REVERB PARAMETER 11
REVERB PARAMETER 12
REVERB PARAMETER 13
REVERB PARAMETER 14
REVERB PARAMETER 15
REVERB PARAMETER 16
see Effect Parameter List
”
”
”
”
”
Depends on reverb type
”
”
”
”
”
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
01-7F
00-7F
CHORUS TYPE MSB
CHORUS TYPE LSB
CHORUS PARAMETER 1
CHORUS PARAMETER 2
CHORUS PARAMETER 3
CHORUS PARAMETER 4
CHORUS PARAMETER 5
CHORUS PARAMETER 6
CHORUS PARAMETER 7
CHORUS PARAMETER 8
CHORUS PARAMETER 9
CHORUS PARAMETER 10
CHORUS RETURN
CHORUS PAN
SEND CHORUS TO REVERB
see Effect Type List
00 : basic type
see Effect Parameter List
”
”
”
”
”
”
”
”
”
-∞dB...0dB...+6dB(0...64...127)
L63...C...R63(1...64...127)
-∞dB...0dB... +6dB(0...64...127)
41 (=CHORUS1)
00
Depends on chorus Type
”
”
”
”
”
”
”
”
”
40
40
00
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
CHORUS PARAMETER 11
CHORUS PARAMETER 12
CHORUS PARAMETER 13
CHORUS PARAMETER 14
CHORUS PARAMETER 15
CHORUS PARAMETER 16
see Effect Parameter List
”
”
”
”
”
Depends on chorus Type
”
”
”
”
”
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
01-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-01
00-0F,7F
VARIATION TYPE MSB
VARIATION TYPE LSB
VARIATION PARAMETER 1 MSB
VARIATION PARAMETER 1 LSB
VARIATION PARAMETER 2 MSB
VARIATION PARAMETER 2 LSB
VARIATION PARAMETER 3 MSB
VARIATION PARAMETER 3 LSB
VARIATION PARAMETER 4 MSB
VARIATION PARAMETER 4 LSB
VARIATION PARAMETER 5 MSB
VARIATION PARAMETER 5 LSB
VARIATION PARAMETER 6 MSB
VARIATION PARAMETER 6 LSB
VARIATION PARAMETER 7 MSB
VARIATION PARAMETER 7 LSB
VARIATION PARAMETER 8 MSB
VARIATION PARAMETER 8 LSB
VARIATION PARAMETER 9 MSB
VARIATION PARAMETER 9 LSB
VARIATION PARAMETER 10 MSB
VARIATION PARAMETER 10 LSB
VARIATION RETURN
VARIATION PAN
SEND VARIATION TO REVERB
SEND VARIATION TO CHORUS
VARIATION CONNECTION
VARIATION PART
05 (=DELAY L, C, R)
00
Depends on variation type
”
”
”
”
”
”
”
”
”
”
”
”
”
”
”
”
”
”
”
40
40
00
00
00
7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
MW VARIATION CONTROL DEPTH
BEND VARIATION CONTROL DEPTH
CAT VARIATION CONTROL DEPTH
AC1 VARIATION CONTROL DEPTH
AC2 VARIATION CONTROL DEPTH
see Effect Type List
00 : basic type
see Effect Parameter List
”
”
”
”
”
”
”
”
”
”
”
”
”
”
”
”
”
”
”
-∞ dB...0dB...+6dB(0...64...127)
L63...C...R63(1...64...127)
-∞ dB...0dB...+6dB(0...64...127)
-∞ dB...0dB...+6dB(0...64...127)
0:INSERTION, 1:SYSTEM
Part1...16(0...15)
0FF (127)
-64 - +63
-64 - +63
-64 - +63
-64 - +63
-64 - +63
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
VARIATION PARAMETER 11
VARIATION PARAMETER 12
VARIATION PARAMETER 13
VARIATION PARAMETER 14
VARIATION PARAMETER 15
VARIATION PARAMETER 16
see Effect Parameter List
”
”
”
”
”
Depends on variation type
”
”
”
”
”
40
40
40
40
40
MIDI Data Format
<Table 1-4>
MIDI Parameter Change table (MULTI PART) [XG]
Address
(H)
08
nn
nn
nn
nn
nn
nn
00
01
02
03
04
05
Size
(H)
1
1
1
1
1
1
Data
(H)
00 - 20
00 - 7F
00 - 7F
00 - 7F
00 - 0F, 7F
00 - 01
nn
06
1
00 - 02
nn
07
1
00 - 03
nn
nn
nn
08
09
0A
1
2
28 - 58
00 - FF
nn
nn
nn
nn
nn
nn
nn
nn
nn
nn
0B
0C
0D
0E
0F
10
11
12
13
14
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
00 - 7F
00 - 7F
00 - 7F
00 - 7F
00 - 7F
00 - 7F
00 - 7F
00 - 7F
00 - 7F
00 - 7F
0 - 32
0 - 127
0 - 127
1 - 128
1 - 16,OFF
0:MONO
1:POLY
SAME NOTE NUMBER KEY ON ASSIGN 0:SINGLE
1:MULTI
2:INST (for DRUM)
PART MODE
0:NORMAL
1:DRUM
2-3:DRUMS1 - 2
NOTE SHIFT
-24 - +24 [semitones]
DETUNE
-12.8 - +12.7 [Hz]
1st bit3-0→bit7-4
2nd bit3-0→bit3-0
VOLUME
0 - 127
VELOCITY SENSE DEPTH
0 - 127
VELOCITY SENSE OFFSET
0 - 127
PAN
0/random, 1/L63-64/C-127/R63
NOTE LIMIT LOW
C-2 - G8
NOTE LIMIT HIGH
C-2 - G8
DRY LEVEL
0 - 127
CHORUS SEND
0 - 127
REVERB SEND
0 - 127
VARIATION SEND
0 - 127
nn
nn
nn
nn
nn
nn
nn
nn
15
16
17
18
19
1A
1B
1C
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
00 - 7F
00 - 7F
00 - 7F
00 - 7F
00 - 7F
00 - 7F
00 - 7F
00 - 7F
VIBRATO RATE
VIBRATO DEPTH
VIBRATO DELAY
FILTER CUTOFF FREQUENCY
FILTER RESONANCE
EG ATTACK TIME
EG DECAY TIME
EG RELEASE TIME
-64 - +63
-64 - +63
-64 - +63
-64 - +63
-64 - +63
-64 - +63
-64 - +63
-61 - +63
40
40 (drum part ignores)
40 (drum part ignores)
40
40
40
40
40
nn
nn
nn
nn
nn
nn
1D
1E
1F
20
21
22
1
1
1
1
1
1
28 - 58
00 - 7F
00 - 7F
00 - 7F
00 - 7F
00 - 7F
MW PITCH CONTROL
MW FILTER CONTROL
MW AMPLITUDE CONTROL
MW LFO PMOD DEPTH
MW LFO FMOD DEPTH
MW LFO AMOD DEPTH
-24 -+24 [semitones]
-9600 - +9450 [cent]
-64 - +63
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 127
40
40
40
0A
00
00
nn
23
nn
24
nn
25
nn
26
nn
27
nn
28
TOTAL SIZE
nn
30
nn
31
nn
32
nn
33
nn
34
nn
35
nn
36
nn
37
nn
38
nn
39
nn
3A
nn
3B
nn
3C
nn
3D
nn
3E
nn
3F
1
1
1
1
1
1
29
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
28 - 58
00 - 7F
00 - 7F
00 - 7F
00 - 7F
00 - 7F
BEND PITCH CONTROL
BEND FILTER CONTROL
BEND AMPLITUDE CONTROL
BEND LFO PMOD DEPTH
BEND LFO FMOD DEPTH
BEND LFO AMOD DEPTH
-24 - +24 [semitones]
-9600 - +9450 [cent]
-64 - +63
+100 - +100 [%]
+100 - +100 [%]
+100 - +100 [%]
42
40
40
40
40
40
00 - 01
00 - 01
00 - 01
00 - 01
00 - 01
00 - 01
00 - 01
00 - 01
00 - 01
00 - 01
00 - 01
00 - 01
00 - 01
00 - 01
00 - 01
00 - 01
Rcv PITCH BEND
Rcv CH AFTER TOUCH (CAT)
Rcv PROGRAM CHANGE
Rcv CONTROL CHANGE
Rcv POLY AFTER TOUCH (PAT)
Rcv NOTE MESSAGE
Rcv RPN
Rcv NRPN
Rcv MODULATION
Rcv VOLUME
Rcv PAN
Rcv EXPRESSION
Rcv HOLD1
Rcv PORTAMENTO
Rcv SOSTENUTO
Rcv SOFT PEDAL
0/OFF, 1/ON
0/OFF, 1/ON
0/OFF, 1/ON
0/OFF, 1/ON
0/OFF, 1/ON
0/OFF, 1/ON
0/OFF, 1/ON
0/OFF, 1/ON
0/OFF, 1/ON
0/OFF, 1/ON
0/OFF, 1/ON
0/OFF, 1/ON
0/OFF, 1/ON
0/OFF, 1/ON
0/OFF, 1/ON
0/OFF, 1/ON
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
XG=01, GM=00
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
nn
nn
1
1
00 - 01
00 - 7F
Rcv BANK SELECT
SCALE TUNING C
0/OFF,1/ON
-64 - +63 [cent]
XG=01, GM=00
40
Description
ELEMENT RESERVE
BANK SELECT MSB
BANK SELECT LSB
PROGRAM NUMBER
Rcv CHANNEL
MONO/POLY MODE
Default value
(H)
part10=0, other =2
part10=7F, other=0
00
00
part no.
01
1 (all part)
part10=2, other=0
00 (other than Part10)
02 (Part10)
40
08 00
(80)
64
40
40
40
00
7F
7F
00
40
00
Appendix
MIDI Data Format
40
41
Parameter
A-27
MIDI Data Format
nn
nn
nn
nn
nn
nn
nn
nn
nn
nn
nn
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
4A
4B
4C
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
00 - 7F
00 - 7F
00 - 7F
00 - 7F
00 - 7F
00 - 7F
00 - 7F
00 - 7F
00 - 7F
00 - 7F
00 - 7F
SCALE TUNING C#
SCALE TUNING D
SCALE TUNING D#
SCALE TUNING E
SCALE TUNING F
SCALE TUNING F#
SCALE TUNING G
SCALE TUNING G#
SCALE TUNING A
SCALE TUNING A#
SCALE TUNING B
-64 - +63 [cent]
-64 - +63 [cent]
-64 - +63 [cent]
-64 - +63 [cent]
-64 - +63 [cent]
-64 - +63 [cent]
-64 - +63 [cent]
-64 - +63 [cent]
-64 - +63 [cent]
-64 - +63 [cent]
-64 - +63 [cent]
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
nn
nn
nn
nn
nn
nn
4D
4E
4F
50
51
52
1
1
1
1
1
1
28 - 58
00 - 7F
00 - 7F
00 - 7F
00 - 7F
00 - 7F
CAT PITCH CONTROL
CAT FILTER CONTROL
CAT AMPLITUDE CONTROL
CAT LFO PMOD DEPTH
CAT LFO FMOD DEPTH
CAT LFO AMOD DEPTH
-24 - +24 [semitones]
-9600 - +9450 [cent]
-64 - +63
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 127
40
40
40
00
00
00
nn
nn
nn
nn
nn
nn
53
54
55
56
57
58
1
1
1
1
1
1
28 - 58
00 - 7F
00 - 7F
00 - 7F
00 - 7F
00 - 7F
PAT PITCH CONTROL
PAT FILTER CONTROL
PAT AMPLITUDE CONTROL
PAT LFO PMOD DEPTH
PAT LFO FMOD DEPTH
PAT LFO AMOD DEPTH
-24 - +24 [semitones]
-9600 - +9450 [cent]
-64 - +63
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 127
40
40
40
00
00
00
nn
nn
nn
nn
nn
nn
nn
59
5A
5B
5C
5D
5E
5F
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
00 - 5F
28 - 58
00 - 7F
00 - 7F
00 - 7F
00 - 7F
00 - 7F
AC1 CONTROLLER NUMBER
AC1 PITCH CONTROL
AC1 FILTER CONTROL
AC1 AMPLITUDE CONTROL
AC1 LFO PMOD DEPTH
AC1 LFO FMOD DEPTH
AC1 LFO AMOD DEPTH
0 - 95
-24 - +24 [semitones]
-9600 - +9450 [cent]
-64 - +63
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 127
10
40
40
40
00
00
00
nn
nn
nn
nn
nn
nn
nn
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
00 - 5F
28 - 58
00 - 7F
00 - 7F
00 - 7F
00 - 7F
00 - 7F
AC2 CONTROLLER NUMBER
AC2 PITCH CONTROL
AC2 FILTER CONTROL
AC2 AMPLITUDE CONTROL
AC2 LFO PMOD DEPTH
AC2 LFO FMOD DEPTH
AC2 LFO AMOD DEPTH
0 - 95
-24 - +24 [semitones]
-9600 - +9450 [cent]
-64 - +63
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 127
11
40
40
40
00
00
00
nn
nn
67
68
1
1
00 - 01
00 - 7F
PORTAMENTO SWITCH
PORTAMENTO TIME
0/OFF, 1/ON
0 - 127
00
00
1
1
1
1
1
1
3F
00 - 7F
00 - 7F
00 - 7F
00 - 7F
01 - 7F
01 - 7F
PITCH EG INITIAL LEVEL
PITCH EG ATTACK TIME
PITCH EG RELEASE LEVEL
PITCH EG RELEASE TIME
VELOCITY LIMIT LOW
VELOCITY LIMIT HIGH
-64 -+63
-64 - +63
-64 - +63
-64 - +63
1 - 127
1 - 127
40
40
40
40
01
7F
Parameter
Description
PITCH COARSE
PITCH FINE
LEVEL
ALTERNATE GROUP
PAN
REVERB SEND
CHORUS SEND
VARIATION SEND
-64 - +63
-64 - +63 [cent]
0 - 127
0/OFF, 1 - 127
0/random, 1/L63 - 64/C - 127/R63
0 - 127
0 - 127
0 - 127
Default
(H)
40
40
Depends on the note
”
”
”
”
7F
nn
69
nn
6A
nn
6B
nn
6C
nn
6D
nn
6E
TOTAL SIZE
nn = Part Number (0:1Part, 1:2Part, 2:3Part, ..., 15:16Part)
For the DRUM PART, the following parameters have no effect.
•
•
•
•
•
SOFT PEDAL
BANK SELECT LSB
MONO/POLY
SCALE TUNING
PORTAMENTO
•
•
•
•
•
PITCH EG INITIAL LEVEL
PITCH EG ATTACK TIME
PITCH EG RELEASE LEVEL
PITCH EF RELEASE TIME
POLY AFTER TOUCH
<Table 1-5>
MIDI Parameter Change table (DRUM SETUP) [XG]
Address
(H)
3n
rr
3n
rr
3n
rr
3n
rr
3n
rr
3n
rr
3n
rr
3n
rr
A-28
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
Size
(H)
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Data
(H)
00 - 7F
00 - 7F
00 - 7F
00 - 7F
00 - 7F
00 - 7F
00 - 7F
00 - 7F
MIDI Data Format
3n
rr
08
3n
rr
09
3n
rr
0A
3n
rr
0B
3n
rr
0C
3n
rr
0D
3n
rr
0E
3n
rr
0F
TOTAL SIZE
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
10
00 - 01
00 - 01
00 - 01
00 - 7F
00 - 7F
00 - 7F
00 - 7F
00 - 7F
KEY ASSIGN
Rcv NOTE OFF
Rcv NOTE ON
FILTER CUTOFF FREQUENCY
FILTER RESONANCE
EG ATTACK RATE
EG DECAY1 RATE
EG DECAY2 RATE
0/SINGLE, 1/MULTI
0/OFF, 1/ON
0/OFF, 1/ON
-64 - +63
-64 - +63
-64 - +63
-64 - +63
-64 - +63
00
Depends on the note
01
40
40
40
40
40
[Note]
n: Drum number (0 - 1)
rr: note number (0D - 5B)
When XG system on or GM mode on messages are received, all Drum Setup parameters are initialized.
The Drum Setup Reset message can be used to initialized each Drum Setup parameter.
Selecting a Drum Set will cause the Drum Setup parameter values to be initialized.
<Table 2-1>
Parameter Bass Address
Model ID = 4B [QS300]
Bulk Dump
Address
(H) (M) (L)
USER
11
00
00
NORMAL
VOICE
00
1F
00
Description
User Normal Voice 1
:
User Normal Voice 32
<Table 2-2>
MIDI Bulk Dump table (USER NORMAL VOICE) [QS300]
Address
(H)
Parameter
17D 20-7E
Voice Name
Description
Default
(H)
[Common]
11
nn
01-03
00-7F
0D
:
3C
3D
3E
3F
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
4A
4B
4C
4D
4E
4F
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
not used
”
”
Element Switch
Voice Level
1:Element 1 on, 2:Element 2 on, 3:Element 1 and 2 on
not used
”
”
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-01
00-02
00-01
00-3F
00-7F
00-7F
00-3F
00-0F
00-1F
20-60
0E -72
00-05
00-7F
00-03
39-47
39-47
39-47
00-7F
00-3F
00-3F
00-3F
Wave Number High
Wave Number Low
Note Limit Low
Note Limit High
Velocity Limit Low
Velocity Limit High
Filter EG Velocity Curve
LFO Wave Select
LFO Phase Initialize
LFO Speed
LFO Delay
LFO Fade Time
LFO PMD Depth
LFO CMD Depth
LFO AMD Depth
Note Shift
Detune
Pitch Scaling
Pitch Scaling Center Note
Pitch EG Depth
Velocity PEG Level Sensitivity
Velocity PEG Rate Sensitivity
PEG Rate Scaling
PEG Rate Scaling Center Note
PEG Rate 1
PEG Rate 2
PEG Rate 3
MIDI Data Format
00
:
07
08
:
0A
0B
0C
Appendix
Size Data
(H) (H)
[Element 1]
bit13-bit7
bit6-bit0
0:saw, 1:tri, 2:S&H
0:OFF, 1:ON
0:100%, 1:50%, 2:20%, 3:10%, 4:5%, 5:0%
0:1/2oct, 1:1oct, 2:2oct, 3:4oct
A-29
MIDI Data Format
58
59
5A
5B
5C
5D
5E
5F
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
6A
6B
6C
6D
6E
6F
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
7A
7B
7C
7D
7E
7F
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
8A
8B
8C
00-3F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-3F
00-07
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
39-47
39-47
39-47
00-7F
00-3F
00-3F
00-3F
00-3F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-06
00-0F
39-47
00-7F
00-0F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
00-7F
39-47
8D
:
DC
DD
:
12C
12D
:
17C
TOTAL SIZE
17D
nn=Voice Number (00-1F)
A-30
PEG Rate 4
PEG Level 0
PEG Level 1
PEG Level 2
PEG Level 3
PEG Level 4
Filter Resonance
Velocity Sensitivity
Cutoff Frequency
Cutoff Scaling Break Point 1
Cutoff Scaling Break Point 2
Cutoff Scaling Break Point 3
Cutoff Scaling Break Point 4
Cutoff Scaling Offset 1
Cutoff Scaling Offset 2
Cutoff Scaling Offset 3
Cutoff Scaling Offset 4
Velocity FEG Level Sensitivity
Velocity FEG Rate Sensitivity
FEG Rate Scaling
FEG Rate Scaling Center Note
FEG Rate 1
FEG Rate 2
FEG Rate 3
FEG Rate 4
FEG Level 0
FEG Level 1
FEG Level 2
FEG Level 3
FEG Level 4
Element Level
Level Scaling Break Point 1
Level Scaling Break Point 2
Level Scaling Break Point 3
Level Scaling Break Point 4
Level Scaling Offset 1
Level Scaling Offset 2
Level Scaling Offset 3
Level Scaling Offset 4
Velocity Curve
Pan
AEG Rate Scaling
AEG Scaling Center Note
AEG Key on Delay
AEG Attack Rate
AEG Decay 1 Rate
AEG Decay 2 Rate
AEG Release Rate
AEG Decay 1 Level
AEG Decay 2 Level
Address Offset High
Address Offset Low
Resonance Sensitivity
0 (Left)-14 (Right), 15:Scaling
bit13-bit7
bit6-bit0
[Element 2]
same as [Element 1]
”
”
[Element 3]
not used
”
”
[Element 4]
not used
”
”
MIDI Data Format
XG Normal Voice List
Bank Select MSB = 000, LSB = Bank Number
Voice names in bold typeface are voices that can be selected in the Disklavier.
The Disklavier can produce all the voices listed below, but can only display bank 0 voices.
Instrument
Group
Piano
Instrument
Group
Organ
Guitar
Program Bank
Voice Name
#
#
17
0
DrawOrgn
32
DetDrwOr
33
60sDrOr1
34
60sDrOr2
35
70sDrOr1
36
DrawOrg2
37
60sDrOr3
38
EvenBar
40
16+2"2/3
64
Organ Ba
65
70sDrOr2
66
CheezOrg
67
DrawOrg3
18
0
PercOrgn
24
70sPcOr1
32
DetPrcOr
33
LiteOrg
37
PercOrg2
19
0
RockOrgn
64
RotaryOr
65
SloRotar
66
FstRotar
20
0
ChrchOrg
32
ChurOrg3
35
ChurOrg2
40
NotreDam
64
OrgFlute
65
TrmOrgFl
21
0
ReedOrgn
40
Puff Org
22
0
Acordion
32
AccordIt
23
0
Harmnica
32
Harmo 2
24
0
TangoAcd
64
TngoAcd2
25
0
NylonGtr
16
NylonGt2
25
NylonGt3
43
VelGtHrm
96
Ukulele
26
0
SteelGtr
16
SteelGt2
35
12StrGtr
40
Nyln&Stl
41
Stl&Body
96
Mandolin
27
0
Jazz Gtr
18
MelloGtr
32
JazzAmp
28
0
CleanGtr
32
ChorusGt
29
0
Mute.Gtr
40
FunkGtr1
41
MuteStlG
43
FunkGtr2
45
Jazz Man
30
0
Ovrdrive
43
Gt.Pinch
31
0
Dist.Gtr
40
FeedbkGt
41
FeedbGt2
32
0
GtrHarmo
65
GtFeedbk
66
GtrHrmo2
Bank 18 : Dark
Bank 19 : Dark
Bank 20 : Resonant
Bank 24 : Attack
Bank 24 : Release
Bank 27 : Reso Sweep
Bank 28 : Muted
Bank 32 : Detune 1
Bank 33 : Detune 2
Element
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
2
2
2
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
2
2
2
1
2
2
2
1
1
2
2
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
1
1
2
1
2
1
2
2
2
1
1
2
1
2
2
1
1
1
Instrument
Group
Bass
Strings
Bank 34 : Detune 3
Bank 35 : Octave 1
Bank 36 : Octave 2
Bank 37 : 5th 1
Bank 38 : 5th 2
Bank 39 : Bend
Bank 40 : Tutti
Bank 41 : Tutti
Bank 42 : Tutti
Program Bank
Voice Name
#
#
33
0
Aco.Bass
40
JazzRthm
45
VXUprght
34
0
FngrBass
18
FingrDrk
27
FlangeBa
40
Ba&DstEG
43
FngrSlap
45
FngBass2
65
ModAlem
35
0
PickBass
28
MutePkBa
36
0
Fretless
32
Fretles2
33
Fretles3
34
Fretles4
96
SynFretl
97
Smooth
37
0
SlapBas1
27
ResoSlap
32
PunchThm
38
0
SlapBas2
43
VeloSlap
39
0
SynBass1
18
SynBa1Dk
20
FastResB
24
AcidBass
35
Clv Bass
40
TeknoBa
64
Oscar
65
SqrBass
66
RubberBa
96
Hammer
40
0
SynBass2
6
MelloSB1
12
Seq Bass
18
ClkSynBa
19
SynBa2Dk
32
SmthBa 2
40
ModulrBa
41
DX Bass
64
X WireBa
41
0
Violin
8
SlowVln
42
0
Viola
43
0
Cello
44
0
Contrabs
45
0
Trem.Str
8
SlowTrStr
40
Susp Str
46
0
Pizz.Str
47
0
Harp
40
YangChin
48
0
Timpani
Element
1
2
2
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
1
1
2
1
2
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
1
2
2
2
1
2
2
1
2
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
2
1
Instrument
Group
Ensemble
Brass
Bank 43 : Velo-Switch
Bank 45 : Velo-Xfade
Bank 64 : Other wave
Bank 65 : Other wave
Bank 66 : Other wave
Bank 67 : Other wave
Bank 68 : Other wave
Bank 69 : Other wave
Bank 70 : Other wave
Program Bank Voice Name
#
#
49
0
Strings1
3
S.Strngs
8
SlowStr
24
ArcoStr
35
60sStrng
40
Orchestr
41
Orchstr2
42
TremOrch
45
VeloStr
50
0
Strings2
3
S.SlwStr
8
LegatoSt
40
Warm Str
41
Kingdom
64
70s Str
65
Str Ens3
51
0
Syn.Str1
27
ResoStr
64
Syn Str4
65
SS Str
52
0
Syn.Str2
53
0
ChoirAah
3
S.Choir
16
Ch.Aahs2
32
MelChoir
40
ChoirStr
54
0
VoiceOoh
55
0
SynVoice
40
SynVox2
41
Choral
64
AnaVoice
56
0
Orch.Hit
35
OrchHit2
64
Impact
57
0
Trumpet
16
Trumpet2
17
BriteTrp
32
WarmTrp
58
0
Trombone
18
Trmbone2
59
0
Tuba
16
Tuba 2
60
0
Mute.Trp
61
0
Fr.Horn
6
FrHrSolo
32
FrHorn2
37
HornOrch
62
0
BrasSect
35
Tp&TbSec
40
BrssSec2
41
HiBrass
42
MelloBrs
63
0
SynBras1
12
QuackBr
20
RezSynBr
24
PolyBrss
27
SynBras3
32
JumpBrss
45
AnaVelBr
64
AnaBrss1
64
0
SynBras2
18
Soft Brs
40
SynBras4
41
ChorBrss
45
VelBras2
64
AnaBras2
Element
1
2
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
2
2
2
2
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
1
2
2
2
2
1
1
2
2
1
2
2
2
1
1
2
2
1
2
1
1
1
2
2
1
2
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
2
2
2
2
2
MIDI Data Format
Bank 0 : (GM)
Bank 1 : Key Scale Planning
Bank 3 : Stereo
Bank 6 : Single
Bank 8 : Slow
Bank 12 : Fast Decay
Bank 14 : Double Attack
Bank 16 : Bright
Bank 17 : Bright
Element
1
1
1
2
2
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
2
2
2
2
1
2
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
1
2
2
2
1
2
1
2
1
1
2
2
1
1
2
1
1
2
2
2
1
1
2
2
1
2
2
2
Appendix
Chromatic
Percussion
Program Bank
Voice Name
#
#
1
0
GrandPno
1
GrndPnoK
18
MelloGrP
40
PianoStr
41
Dream
2
0
BritePno
1
BritPnoK
3
0
E.Grand
1
ElGrPnoK
32
Det.CP80
40
ElGrPno1
41
ElGrPno2
4
0
HnkyTonk
1
HnkyTnkK
5
0
E.Piano1
1
El.Pno1K
18
MelloEP1
32
Chor.EP1
40
HardEl.P
45
VX El.P1
64
60sEl.P
6
0
E.Piano2
1
El.Pno2K
32
Chor.EP2
33
DX Hard
34
DXLegend
40
DX Phase
41
DX+Analg
42
DXKotoEP
45
VX El.P2
7
0
Harpsi.
1
Harpsi.K
25
Harpsi.2
35
Harpsi.3
8
0
Clavi.
1
Clavi. K
27
ClaviWah
64
PulseClv
65
PierceCl
9
0
Celesta
10
0
Glocken
11
0
MusicBox
64
Orgel
12
0
Vibes
1
VibesK
45
HardVibe
13
0
Marimba
1
MarimbaK
64
SineMrmb
97
Balafon2
98
Log Drum
14
0
Xylophon
15
0
TubulBel
96
ChrchBel
97
Carillon
16
0
Dulcimer
35
Dulcimr2
96
Cimbalom
97
Santur
Bank 71 : Other wave
Bank 72 : Other wave
Bank 96 : Other wave
Bank 97 : Other wave
Bank 98 : Other wave
Bank 99 : Other wave
Bank 100 : Other wave
Bank 101 : Other wave
A-31
MIDI Data Format
Bank Select
MSB = 064, LSB = 000
SFX Voice
Instrument Program Bank
Group
#
#
Reed
65
0
66
0
40
43
67
0
40
41
64
68
0
69
0
70
0
71
0
72
0
Pipe
73
0
74
0
75
0
76
0
77
0
78
0
79
0
80
0
Synth Lead 81
0
6
8
18
19
64
65
66
82
0
6
8
18
19
20
24
25
40
41
45
96
83
0
65
84
0
64
85
0
64
65
86
0
24
64
87
0
35
88
0
16
64
65
Synth Pad 89
0
64
90
0
16
17
18
64
65
91
0
64
65
66
67
A-32
EleVoice Name ment
SprnoSax
1
Alto Sax
1
Sax Sect
2
HyprAlto
2
TenorSax
1
BrthTnSx
2
SoftTenr
2
TnrSax 2
1
Bari.Sax
1
Oboe
2
Eng.Horn
1
Bassoon
1
Clarinet
1
Piccolo
1
Flute
1
Recorder
1
PanFlute
1
Bottle
2
Shakhchi
2
Whistle
1
Ocarina
1
SquareLd
2
Square 2
1
LMSquare
2
Hollow
1
Shmoog
2
Mellow
2
SoloSine
2
SineLead
1
Saw.Lead
2
Saw 2
1
ThickSaw
2
DynaSaw
1
DigiSaw
2
Big Lead
2
HeavySyn
2
WaspySyn
2
PulseSaw
2
Dr. Lead
2
VeloLead
2
Seq Ana
2
CaliopLd
2
Pure Pad
2
Chiff Ld
2
Rubby
2
CharanLd
2
DistLead
2
WireLead
2
Voice Ld
2
SynthAah
2
VoxLead
2
Fifth Ld
2
Big Five
2
Bass &Ld
2
Big&Low
2
Fat&Prky
2
SoftWurl
2
NewAgePd 2
Fantasy2
2
Warm Pad 2
ThickPad
2
Soft Pad
2
SinePad
2
Horn Pad
2
RotarStr
2
PolySyPd
2
PolyPd80
2
ClickPad
2
Ana Pad
2
SquarPad
2
Instrument Program Bank
Group
#
#
Synth Pad 92
0
64
66
67
93
0
64
65
94
0
64
65
95
0
96
0
20
27
64
66
Synth
97
0
Effects
45
64
65
66
98
0
27
64
99
0
12
14
18
35
40
41
42
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
100
0
18
19
40
64
65
66
67
101
0
64
96
102
0
64
65
66
67
68
70
71
96
103
0
8
14
64
65
66
67
68
69
104
0
64
EleVoice Name ment
ChoirPad
2
Heaven2
2
Itopia
2
CC Pad
2
BowedPad
2
Glacier
2
GlassPad
2
MetalPad
2
Tine Pad
2
Pan Pad
2
Halo Pad
2
SweepPad
2
Shwimmer
2
Converge
2
PolarPad
2
Celstial
2
Rain
2
ClaviPad
2
HrmoRain
2
AfrcnWnd
2
Caribean
2
SoundTrk
2
Prologue
2
Ancestrl
2
Crystal
2
SynDrCmp
2
Popcorn
2
TinyBell
2
RndGlock
2
GlockChi
2
ClearBel
2
ChorBell
2
SynMalet
1
SftCryst
2
LoudGlok
2
XmasBell
2
VibeBell
2
DigiBell
2
AirBells
2
BellHarp
2
Gamelmba
2
Atmosphr
2
WarmAtms 2
HollwRls
2
NylonEP
2
NylnHarp
2
Harp Vox
2
AtmosPad
2
Planet
2
Bright
2
FantaBel
2
Smokey
2
Goblins
2
GobSyn
2
50sSciFi
2
Ring Pad
2
Ritual
2
ToHeaven
2
Night
2
Glisten
2
BelChoir
2
Echoes
2
EchoPad2
2
Echo Pan
2
EchoBell
2
Big Pan
2
SynPiano
2
Creation
2
Stardust
2
Reso Pan
2
Sci-Fi
2
Starz
2
Instrument Program Bank
Group
#
#
Ethnic
105
0
32
35
96
97
106
0
28
96
97
98
107
0
108
0
96
97
109
0
110
0
111
0
112
0
64
96
97
Percussive 113
0
96
97
98
99
100
101
114
0
115
0
97
98
116
0
96
117
0
96
118
0
64
65
66
119
0
64
65
120
0
Sound
121
0
Effects
122
0
123
0
124
0
125
0
126
0
127
0
128
0
EleVoice Name ment
Sitar
1
DetSitar
2
Sitar 2
2
Tambra
2
Tamboura
2
Banjo
1
MuteBnjo
1
Rabab
2
Gopichnt
2
Oud
2
Shamisen
1
Koto
1
T. Koto
2
Kanoon
2
Kalimba
1
Bagpipe
2
Fiddle
1
Shanai
1
Shanai2
1
Pungi
1
Hichriki
2
TnklBell
2
Bonang
2
Gender
2
Gamelan
2
S.Gamlan
2
Rama Cym
2
AsianBel
2
Agogo
2
SteelDrm
2
GlasPerc
2
ThaiBell
2
WoodBlok
1
Castanet
1
TaikoDrm
1
Gr.Cassa
1
MelodTom 2
Mel Tom2
1
Real Tom
2
Rock Tom
2
Syn.Drum
1
Ana Tom
1
ElecPerc
2
RevCymbl
1
FretNoiz
2
BrthNoiz
2
Seashore
2
Tweet
2
Telphone
1
Helicptr
1
Applause
1
Gunshot
1
Program
#
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
MSB=064
LSB=000
Element
CuttngNz
CttngNz2
1
2
Str Slap
1
Fl.KClik
1
Rain
Thunder
Wind
Stream
Bubble
Feed
1
1
1
2
2
2
Dog
Horse
Bird 2
1
1
1
Ghost
Maou
2
2
Program
#
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
MSB=064
LSB=000
Element
Tel.Dial
DoorSqek
Door Slam
Scratch
Scratch 2
WindChm
Telphon2
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
CarEngin
Car Stop
Car Pass
CarCrash
Siren
Train
Jetplane
Starship
Burst
Coaster
SbMarine
1
1
1
1
2
1
2
2
2
2
2
Laughing
Scream
Punch
Heart
FootStep
1
1
1
1
1
MchinGun
LaserGun
Xplosion
FireWork
1
2
2
2
: No Sound
MIDI Data Format
TG300B Normal Voice List
Bank Select MSB = Bank Number, LSB = ooo
Instrument
Group
Piano
Instrument
Group
Organ
Guitar
Program Bank
Voice Name
#
#
17
0
DrawOrgn
1
70sDrOr1
8
DetDrwOr
9
70sDrOr2
16
60sDrOr1
17
60sDrOr2
18
60sDrOr3
24
CheezOrg
32
DrawOrg2
33
EvenBar
40
Organ Ba
126 Slap-2
127 harpsi1
18
0
PercOrgn
1
70sPcOr1
8
DetPrcOr
32
PercOrg2
126 Slap-3
127 harpsi2
19
0
RockOrgn
8
RotaryOr
16
SloRotar
24
FstRotar
126 Slap-4
127 harpsi3
20
0
ChrchOrg
8
ChurOrg2
16
ChurOrg3
24
OrgFlute
32
TrmOrgFl
126 Slap-5
127 clavi1
21
0
ReedOrgn
126 Slap-6
127 clavi2
22
0
Acordion
8
AccordIt
126 Slap-7
127 clavi3
23
0
Harmnica
1
Harmo 2
126 Slap-8
127 celesta1
24
0
TangoAcd
126 Finger-1
127 celesta2
25
0
NylonGtr
8
Ukulele
16
NylonGt3
24
VelGtHrm
32
NylonGt2
40
LequintG
126 Finger-2
127 synbras1
26
0
SteelGtr
8
12StrGtr
9
Nyln&Stl
16
Mandolin
32
SteelGt2
126 Picked-1
127 synbras2
27
0
Jazz Gtr
1
MelloGtr
8
PdlSteel
126 Picked-2
127 synbras3
28
0
CleanGtr
8
ChorusGt
126 FretlsBs
127 synbras4
Element
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
2
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
1
2
1
2
2
2
1
1
2
2
1
2
1
1
1
1
2
2
1
1
2
2
1
2
2
2
1
1
2
1
1
1
2
2
1
2
1
2
Instrument
Group
Guitar
Bass
Program Bank Voice Name
#
#
29
0
Mute.Gtr
8
FunkGtr1
16
FunkGtr2
126 A-Bass
127 synbass1
30
0
Ovrdrive
126 Choir-1
127 synbass2
31
0
Dist.Gtr
8
FeedbkGt
9
FeedbGt2
126 Choir-2
127 synbass3
32
0
GtrHarmo
8
GtFeedbk
126 Choir-3
127 synbass4
33
0
Aco.Bass
126 Choir-4
127 newagepd
34
0
FngrBass
1
FngBass2
126 Strngs-1
127 synharmo
35
0
PickBass
8
MutePkBa
126 Strngs-2
127 choir pd
36
0
Fretless
1
Fretles2
2
Fretles3
3
Fretles4
4
SynFretl
5
Smooth
126 Strngs-3
127 bowed pd
37
0
SlapBas1
8
ResoSlap
126 Strngs-4
127 soundtrk
38
0
SlapBas2
126 E-Organ1
127 atmosphr
39
0
SynBass1
1
SynBa1Dk
8
AcidBass
9
FastResB
10
TeknoBa
16
ResoBass
126 E-Organ2
127 syn warm
40
0
SynBass2
1
ClkSynBa
2
ModulrBa
3
Seq Bass
8
DX Bass
9
X WireBa
16
RubberBa
17
SynBa2Dk
18
MelloSB1
19
SmthBa 2
126 E-Organ3
127 synfunny
Element
1
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
1
2
1
1
2
1
1
2
2
1
2
2
2
1
1
2
2
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
1
2
2
1
2
2
1
1
1
1
2
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
1
2
2
1
Instrument
Group
Strings
Ensemble
Program Bank Voice Name
#
#
41
0
Violin
8
SlowVln
126 E-Organ4
127 synecho1
42
0
Viola
126 E-Organ5
127 rain
43
0
Cello
126 E-Organ6
127 synoboe
44
0
Contrabs
126 E-Organ7
127 synecho2
45
0
Trem.Str
8
SlowTrStr
9
Susp Str
126 E-Organ8
127 synsolo
46
0
Pizz.Str
126 E-Organ9
127 synrdorg
47
0
Harp
126 SoftTP-1
127 synbell
48
0
Timpani
126 SoftTP-2
127 squareld
49
0
Strings1
1
Slow Str
8
Orchestr
9
Orchstr2
10
TremOrch
11
ChoirStr
16
S.Strngs
24
VeloStr
126 TP/TRB-1
127 strsect1
50
0
Strings2
1
70s Str
8
LegatoSt
9
Warm Str
10
S.SlwStr
126 TP/TRB-2
127 strsect2
51
0
Syn.Str1
1
Syn Str4
126 TP/TRB-3
127 strsect3
52
0
Syn.Str2
126 TP/TRB-4
127 pizz.str
53
0
ChoirAah
8
S.Choir
9
MelChoir
32
Ch.Aahs2
126 TP/TRB-5
127 violin 1
54
0
VoiceOoh
126 TP/TRB-6
127 violin 2
55
0
SynVoice
8
SynVox2
126 Sax-1
127 cello 1
56
0
Orch.Hit
1
OrchHit2
8
Impact
16
LoFiRave
126 Sax-2
127 cello 2
Element
1
1
2
2
1
2
2
1
2
2
1
2
2
1
1
2
2
2
1
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
2
1
1
2
2
2
1
2
2
2
1
2
2
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
1
2
1
1
2
1
1
2
2
2
2
1
1
MIDI Data Format
Element
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
2
1
2
2
2
2
2
1
2
2
2
1
2
2
2
1
2
2
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
2
1
2
1
1
2
1
2
2
1
2
2
1
2
2
2
1
1
1
2
1
2
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
1
2
2
1
2
2
1
2
1
2
2
2
2
Appendix
Chromatic
Percussion
Program Bank
Voice Name
#
#
1
0
GrandPno
8
GrndPnoK
16
MelloGrP
126 A-Piano1
127 a.piano1
2
0
BritePno
8
BritPnoK
126 A-Piano2
127 a.piano2
3
0
E.Grand
1
ElGrPno1
2
ElGrPno2
8
ElGrPnoK
126 A-Piano3
127 a.piano3
4
0
HnkyTonk
8
HnkyTnkK
126 A-Piano4
127 e.piano1
5
0
E.Piano1
8
Chor.EP1
16
VX El.P1
24
60sEl.P
25
HardEl.P
26
MelloEP1
32
El.Pno1K
126 A-Piano5
127 e.piano2
6
0
E.Piano2
8
Chor.EP2
16
VX El.P2
24
DX Hard
32
El.Pno2K
126 A-Piano6
127 e.piano3
7
0
Harpsi.
8
Harpsi.3
16
Harpsi.K
24
Harpsi.2
126 A-Piano7
127 e.piano4
8
0
Clavi.
8
Clavi. K
126 E-Piano1
127 hnkytnk
9
0
Celesta
126 E-Piano2
127 e.organ1
10
0
Glocken
126 E-Piano3
127 e.organ2
11
0
MusicBox
126 A-Guitr1
127 e.organ3
12
0
Vibes
1
HardVibe
8
VibesK
126 A-Guitr2
127 e.organ4
13
0
Marimba
8
MarimbaK
17
Balafon2
24
Log Drum
126 A-Guitr3
127 pipeorg1
14
0
Xylophon
126 E-Guitr1
127 pipeorg2
15
0
TubulBel
8
ChrchBel
9
Carillon
126 E-Guitr2
127 pipeorg3
16
0
Dulcimer
1
Dulcimr2
8
Cimbalom
126 Slap-1
127 acordion
A-33
MIDI Data Format
Instrument
Group
Brass
Reed
Pipe
A-34
Program Bank Voice Name
#
#
57
0
Trumpet
1
Trumpet2
24
BriteTrp
25
WarmTrp
126 Sax-3
127 contrabs
58
0
Trombone
1
Trmbone2
126 Sax-4
127 harp 1
59
0
Tuba
1
Tuba 2
126 Brass-1
127 harp 2
60
0
Mute.Trp
126 Brass-2
127 guitar 1
61
0
Fr.Horn
1
FrHorn2
8
FrHrSolo
16
HornOrch
126 Brass-3
127 guitar 2
62
0
BrasSect
8
BrssSec2
126 Brass-4
127 elecgtr1
63
0
SynBras1
1
PolyBrss
8
SynBras3
9
QuackBr
16
AnaBrss1
126 Brass-5
127 elecgtr2
64
0
SynBras2
1
Soft Brs
8
SynBras4
16
AnaBrss2
17
VelBras2
126 Orch-Hit
127 sitar
65
0
SprnoSax
127 a.bass 1
66
0
Alto Sax
8
HyprAlto
127 a.bass 2
67
0
TnrSax 2
8
BrthTnSx
127 e.bass 1
68
0
Bari.Sax
127 e.bass 2
69
0
Oboe
127 slapbas1
70
0
Eng.Horn
127 slapbas2
71
0
Bassoon
127 fretles1
72
0
Clarinet
127 fretles2
73
0
Piccolo
127 flute1
74
0
Flute
127 flute2
75
0
Recorder
127 piccolo1
76
0
PanFlute
127 piccolo2
77
0
Bottle
127 recorder
78
0
Shakhchi
127 panpipes
79
0
Whistle
127 sax1
80
0
Ocarina
127 sax2
Element
1
1
2
2
1
1
1
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
1
2
2
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
2
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
2
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
1
2
2
1
2
1
1
Instrument
Group
Synth Lead
Synth Pad
Program Bank Voice Name
#
#
81
0
SquareLd
1
Square 2
2
Hollow
3
Mellow
4
SoloSine
5
Shmoog
6
LMSquare
8
SineLead
127 sax3
82
0
Saw.Lead
1
Saw 2
2
PulseSaw
3
ThickSaw
4
Big Lead
5
VeloLead
6
HeavySyn
7
DynaSaw
8
Dr. Lead
16
WaspySyn
127 sax4
83
0
CaliopLd
2
Pure Pad
127 clarint1
84
0
Chiff Ld
127 clarint2
85
0
CharanLd
8
DistLead
127 oboe
86
0
Voice Ld
127 eng.horn
87
0
Fifth Ld
1
Big Five
127 bassoon
88
0
Bass &Ld
1
Big&Low
2
Fat&Prky
127 harmnica
89
0
NewAgePd
1
Fantasy2
127 trumpet1
90
0
Warm Pad
1
ThickPad
2
Horn Pad
3
RotarStr
4
Soft Pad
127 trumpet2
91
0
PolySyPd
1
PolyPd80
127 trmbone1
92
0
ChoirPad
1
Heaven2
127 trmbone2
93
0
BowedPad
127 fr.horn1
94
0
MetalPad
1
Tine Pad
2
Pan Pad
127 fr.horn2
95
0
Halo Pad
127 tuba
96
0
SweepPad
1
PolarPad
8
Converge
9
Shwimmer
10
Celstial
127 brssect1
Element
2
1
1
2
2
2
2
1
1
2
1
2
2
2
2
2
1
2
2
1
2
2
1
2
1
2
2
1
2
1
2
2
1
2
2
2
1
2
2
1
2
2
2
2
2
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
Instrument
Group
Synth
Effects
Ethnic
Program Bank Voice Name
#
#
97
0
Rain
1
HrmoRain
2
AfrcnWnd
8
ClaviPad
127 brssect2
98
0
SoundTrk
1
Ancestrl
2
Prologue
127 vibe1
99
0
Crystal
1
SynMalet
2
SftCryst
3
RndGlock
4
LoudGlok
5
GlockChi
6
ClearBel
7
XmasBell
8
VibeBell
9
DigiBell
16
ChorBell
17
AirBells
18
BellHarp
19
Gamelmba
127 vibe2
100
0
Atmosphr
1
WarmAtms
2
NylnHarp
3
Harp Vox
4
HollwRls
5
NylonEP
6
AtmosPad
127 symallet
101
0
Bright
127 maletwin
102
0
Goblins
1
GobSyn
2
50sSciFi
127 glocken
103
0
Echoes
1
EchoBell
2
Echo Pan
3
EchoPad2
4
Big Pan
6
SynPiano
127 tubulbel
104
0
Sci-Fi
1
Starz
127 xylophon
105
0
Sitar
1
Sitar 2
2
DetSitar
8
Tambra
16
Tamboura
127 marimba
106
0
Banjo
1
MuteBnjo
8
Rabab
16
Gopichnt
24
Oud
127 koto
107
0
Shamisen
127 sho
108
0
Koto
8
T. Koto
16
Kanoon
127 shakhchi
109
0
Kalimba
127 whistle1
110
0
Bagpipe
127 whistle2
111
0
Fiddle
127 bottle
112
0
Shanai
1
Shanai2
8
Pungi
16
Hichriki
127 breath
Element
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
2
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
2
2
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
1
1
2
2
2
1
1
2
1
2
2
2
1
2
2
1
1
2
1
1
1
2
2
Instrument
Group
Percussive
Sound
Effects
Program Bank Voice Name
#
#
113
0
TnklBell
8
Bonang
9
Gender
10
Gamelan
11
S.Gamlan
16
Rama Cym
127 timpani
114
0
Agogo
127 melotom
115
0
SteelDrm
127 deepsnar
116
0
WoodBlok
8
Castanet
127 e.perc1
117
0
TaikoDrm
8
Gr.Cassa
127 e.perc2
118
0
MelodTom
1
Real Tom
8
Mel Tom2
9
Rock Tom
127 taiko
119
0
Syn.Drum
8
Ana Tom
9
ElecPerc
127 taikorim
120
0
RevCymbl
127 cymbal
121
0
FretNoiz
1
CuttngNz
2
Str Slap
3
CttngNz2
127 castanet
122
0
BrthNoiz
1
Fl.KClik
127 triangle
123
0
Seashore
1
Rain
2
Thunder
3
Wind
4
Stream
5
Bubble
127 orchehit
124
0
Tweet
1
Dog
2
Horse
3
Bird 2
127 telphone
125
0
Telphone
1
Tel.Dial
2
DoorSqek
3
DoorSlam
4
Scratch
5
WindChm
6
Scratch2
127 bird
126
0
Helicptr
1
CarEngin
2
Car Stop
3
Car Pass
4
CarCrash
5
Siren
6
Train
7
Jetplane
8
Starship
9
Burst
16
Coaster
127 jam
127
0
Applause
1
Laughing
2
Scream
3
Punch
4
Heart
5
FootStep
127 efctwatr
128
0
Gunshot
1
MchinGun
2
LaserGun
3
Xplosion
127 efctjngl
Element
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
2
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
1
2
1
1
1
2
1
1
2
2
1
1
2
1
2
1
1
2
1
1
1
2
2
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
2
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
2
2
2
MIDI Data Format
XG Drum Voice List
Bank Select MSB = Bank Number, LSB = 000
Drum kit names in bold typeface are those that can be selected in the Disklavier.
Bank
127
127
127
127
127
127
127
127
127
126
126
Program #
1
2
9
17
25
26
33
41
49
1
2
Standard Kit
Standard2 Kit
Room Kit
Rock Kit
Electro Kit
Analog Kit
Jazz Kit
Brush Kit
Classic Kit
SFX 1
SFX 2
Reverse Cymbal
Reverse Cymbal
Note#
Note
13
C#
-1
Key
3
Alternate
14
D
-1
3
15
D# -1
Hi Q
16
E
-1
Whip Slap
17
F
-1
4
18
F#
-1
4
19
G
-1
Finger Snap
20
G# -1
Click Noise
21
A
Metronome Click
22
A# -1
Metronome Bell
23
B
-1
Seq Click L
24
C
0
Seq Click H
25
C#
0
26
D
0
27
D# 0
28
E
29
F
30
F#
0
Castanet
31
G
0
Snare L
32
G# 0
Sticks
33
A
Bass Drum L
34
A# 0
Open Rim Shot
Open Rim Shot 2
35
B
0
Bass Drum M
Bass Drum M 2
36
C
1
Bass Drum H
Bass Drum H 2
37
C#
1
Side Stick
38
D
1
Snare M
39
D# 1
Hand Clap
40
E
1
Snare H
41
F
1
42
F#
1
43
G
1
44
G# 1
45
A
46
A# 1
47
B
1
Mid Tom L
Room Tom 4
Rock Tom 4
E Tom 4
48
C
2
Mid Tom H
Room Tom 5
Rock Tom 5
E Tom 5
49
C#
2
Crash Cymbal 1
50
D
2
High Tom
51
D# 2
Ride Cymbal 1
52
E
2
Chinese Cymbal
53
F
2
Ride Cymbal Cup
Tire Screech
54
F#
2
Tambourine
Car Passing
off
Surdo Open
Scratch Push
Scratch Pull
Brush Tap
O
Brush Swirl L
0
O
Brush Swirl H
0
O
Snare Roll
Brush Slap
0
Floor Tom L
1
1
2
Hi Q
Hi Q
SD Rock M
Snare M
SD Rock H
Bass Drum M
Bass Drum H 4
Bass Drum M
Bass Drum H 3
BD Rock
BD Analog L
BD Rock
BD Gate
BD Analog H
Brush Slap L
Bass Drum L2
Gran Cassa
BD Jazz
BD Soft
Gran Cassa Mute
Analog Side Stick
Snare M 2
SD Room L
SD Rock
SD Rock L
Analog Snare L
Brush Slap M
Marching Sn M
Snare H 2
SD Room H
SD Rock Rim
SD Rock H
Analog Snare H
Brush Tap H
Marching Sn H
Room Tom 1
Rock Tom 1
E Tom 1
Brush Tom 1
Jazz Tom 1
Guitar Cutting Noise
Dial Tone
Guitar Cutting Noise 2
Door Creaking
Door Slam
String Slap
Analog Tom 1
Jazz Tom 1
Room Tom 2
Rock Tom 2
E Tom 2
Room Tom 3
Rock Tom 3
E Tom 3
Analog Tom 2
Scratch
Scratch 2
Windchime
Analog HH Closed 1
Hi-Hat Pedal
Low Tom
1
Snare L 2
Hi-Hat Closed
Floor Tom H
1
Snare Roll 2
Telephone Ring2
Jazz Tom 2
Brush Tom 2
Jazz Tom 2
Jazz Tom 3
Brush Tom 3
Jazz Tom 3
Analog HH Closed 2
Hi-Hat Open
Analog Tom 3
Analog HH Open
Analog Tom 4
Jazz Tom 4
Brush Tom 4
Analog Tom 5
Jazz Tom 5
Brush Tom 5
Analog Cymbal
Room Tom 6
Rock Tom 6
E Tom 6
Analog Tom 6
Jazz Tom 4
Jazz Tom 5
Hand Cym.Open L
Jazz Tom 6
Brush Tom 6
Jazz Tom 6
Hand Cym.Closed L
FL.Key Click
Splash Cymbal
Engine Start
Crash
56
G# 2
Cowbell
57
A
Crash Cymbal 2
58
A# 2
Vibraslap
59
B
2
Ride Cymbal 2
60
C
3
Bongo H
Burst Noise
61
C#
3
Bongo L
Coaster
62
D
3
Conga H Mute
Analog Conga H
63
D# 3
Conga H Open
Analog Conga M
64
E
Conga L
Analog Conga L
65
F
66
F#
3
Timbale L
67
G
3
Agogo H
68
G# 3
Agogo L
69
A
Cabasa
70
A# 3
71
B
3
O
72
C
4
73
C#
4
74
D
4
75
D# 4
Claves
76
E
4
Wood Block H
77
F
4
78
F#
4
Cuica Mute
Scratch Push
Scratch Push
79
G
4
Cuica Open
Scratch Pull
Scratch Pull
80
G# 4
2
Triangle Mute
81
A
2
Triangle Open
82
A# 4
Shaker
83
B
4
Jingle Bell
84
C
5
Bell Tree
85
C#
5
Horse Gallop
86
D
5
Bird 2
87
D# 5
88
E
5
89
F
5
90
F#
5
91
G
5
2
3
3
Siren
Hand Cym.Open H
Train
Jetplane
Hand Cym.Closed H
Starship
SbMarine
Timbale H
3
4
Analog Cowbell
MIDI Data Format
G
-1
Surdo Mute
Appendix
55
assign
Maracas
Analog Maracas
Rain
Laughing
Thunder
Screaming
Wind
Punch
Samba Whistle H
Stream
Heartbeat
O
Samba Whistle L
Bubble
Footsteps
O
Guiro Long
Guiro Short
Feed
Analog Claves
Wood Block L
Dog
Machine Gun
Laser Gun
Explosion
FireWork
Ghost
Maou
: Same as Standard kit
: No sound
A-35
MIDI Data Format
TG300B Drum Voice List
Program #
Note# Note
Alternate
1
9
17
25
26
33
41
49
57
128
Standard Kit
Room Kit
Power Kit
Electro Kit
Analog Kit
Jazz Kit
Brush Kit
Orchestra Kit
SFX Set
C/M Kit
assign
25
C#
0
Snare Roll
26
D
0
Finger Snap
27
D#
0
Hi Q
Hi-Hat Closed
28
E
0
Whip Slap
Hi-Hat Pedal
29
F
0
7
Scratch Push
Hi-Hat Open
30
F#
0
7
Scratch Pull
Ride Cymbal 1
31
G
0
Sticks
32
G#
0
Click Noise
33
A
0
Metronome Click
34
A#
0
Metronome Bell
35
B
0
Bass Drum M
36
C
1
Bass Drum H
37
C#
1
Side Stick
38
D
1
Snare M
39
D#
1
Hand Clap
40
E
1
Snare H
41
F
1
Floor Tom L
42
F#
1
43
G
1
44
G#
1
45
A
1
46
A#
1
1
Hi-Hat Closed
1
Hi-Hat Pedal
Floor Tom H
Low Tom
1
BD Jazz
BD Power
BD Electronic
SD Power
SD Electronic
BD Jazz
Analog Snare L
BD Soft
Gran Cassa
Brush Tap
Concert SD
Brush Slap
Castanet
High-Q
Brush Swirl
Concert SD
Slap
Jazz Tom 1
Jazz Tom 1
Timpani F
Scratch Push
Timpani F#
Scratch Pull
Jazz Tom 2
Jazz Tom 2
SD Power
Room Tom 1
Room Tom 1
E Tom 1
Room Tom 2
Room Tom 2
E Tom 2
Analog Tom 1
Analog HH Closed 1
Analog Tom 2
Analog HH Closed 2
Room Tom 3
Room Tom 3
E Tom 3
Hi-Hat Open
Analog Tom 3
Jazz Tom 3
Jazz Tom 3
Analog HH Open
Timpani G
Sticks
Timpani G#
Square Click
Timpani A
Metronome Click
Timpani A#
Metronome Bell
47
B
1
Mid Tom L
Room Tom 4
Room Tom 4
E Tom 4
Analog Tom 4
Jazz Tom 4
Jazz Tom 4
Timpani B
Guitar Fret Noise
48
C
2
Mid Tom H
Room Tom 5
Room Tom 5
E Tom 5
Analog Tom 5
Jazz Tom 5
Jazz Tom 5
Timpani C
Guitar Cutting Down
Timpani C#
Guitar Cutting Up
Room Tom 6
Room Tom 6
E Tom 6
Jazz Tom 6
Jazz Tom 6
49
C#
2
Crash Cymbal 1
50
D
2
High Tom
51
D#
2
Ride Cymbal 1
52
E
2
Chinese Cymbal
53
F
2
Ride Cymbal Cup
54
F#
2
Tambourine
55
G
2
Splash Cymbal
56
G#
2
Cowbell
57
A
2
Crash Cymbal 2
58
A#
2
Vibraslap
59
B
2
Ride Cymbal 2
60
C
3
Bongo H
Analog Cymbal
Analog Tom 6
Reverse Cymbal
Timpani D
Ac Bass Slap
Timpani D#
FL.Key Click
Timpani E
Laughing
Timpani F
Screaming
Footsteps 2
Applause
Hand Cym.2
Door Creaking
Door Slam
C#
3
Bongo L
D
3
Conga H Mute
Analog Conga H
Windchime
63
D#
3
Conga H Open
Analog Conga M
Scratch
Engine Start
Analog Conga L
64
E
3
Conga L
65
F
3
Timbale H
Car Passing
66
F#
3
Timbale L
Crash
67
G
3
Agogo H
Siren
68
G#
3
Agogo L
A
3
Cabasa
A#
3
Maracas
71
B
3
4
Hi-Hat Open 2
Footsteps 1
61
69
Hi-Hat Open 1
Heartbeat
Hand Cym.1
62
70
SD Electro
Punch
Analog Cowbell
Tire Screech
Train
Jetplane
Analog Maracas
Helicopter
2
Samba Whistle H
Starship
72
C
2
Samba Whistle L
Gunshot
73
C#
4
3
Guiro Short
Machine Gun
74
D
4
3
Guiro Long
Laser Gun
Analog Claves
Vibraslap
75
D#
4
Claves
76
E
4
Wood Block H
Dog
Laughing
77
F
4
Wood Block L
Horse Gallop
Screaming
78
F#
4
4
Cuica Mute
Bird Tweet
Punch
79
G
4
4
Cuica Open
Rain
Explosion
Heartbeat
80
G#
4
5
Triangle Mute
Thunder
Footsteps 1
81
A
4
5
Triangle Open
Wind
Footsteps 2
82
A#
4
Shaker
Seashore
Applause
83
B
4
Jingle Bell
Stream
Door Creaking
84
C
5
Bell Tree
Bubble
Door Slam
85
C#
5
Castanet
Scratch
86
D
5
6
Surdo Mute
87
D#
5
6
Surdo Open
88
E
5
Windchime
89
F
5
Car Passing
90
F#
5
Crash
Engine Start
Applause
Tire Screech
91
G
5
Siren
92
G#
5
Train
93
A
5
Jetplain
94
A#
5
Helicopter
95
B
5
Starship
96
C
6
Gunshot
97
C#
6
Machine Gun
98
D
6
Laser Gun
99
D#
6
Explosion
100
E
6
Dog
101
F
6
Horse Gallop
102
F#
6
Bird Tweet
103
G
6
Rain
104
G#
6
Thunder
105
A
6
Wind
106
A#
6
Seashore
107
B
6
Stream
108
C
7
Bubble
: Same as Standard kit
: No sound
A-36
BD Analog H
Analog Side Stick
MIDI Data Format
Effect Type List
Effect Type
Description
Effect turned off.
Reverb simulating the resonance of a hall.
Reverb simulating the resonance of a hall.
Reverb simulating the resonance of a room.
Reverb simulating the resonance of a room.
Reverb simulating the resonance of a room.
Reverb appropriate for a solo instrument.
Reverb appropriate for a solo instrument.
Reverb simulating a metal plate reverb unit.
A unique short reverb with a bit of initial delay.
Simulation of a tunnel space expanding to left and right.
A bit of initial delay followed by reverb with a unique resonance.
NO EFFECT
CHORUS1
CHORUS2
CHORUS3
CHORUS4
CELESTE1
CELESTE2
CELESTE3
CELESTE4
FLANGER1
FLANGER2
FLANGER3
Effect turned off.
Conventional chorus program that adds natural spaciousness.
Conventional chorus program that adds natural spaciousness.
Conventional chorus program that adds natural spaciousness.
Chorus with stereo input. The pan setting specified for the Part will also apply to the effect sound.
A 3-phase LFO adds modulation and spaciousness to the sound.
A 3-phase LFO adds modulation and spaciousness to the sound.
A 3-phase LFO adds modulation and spaciousness to the sound.
Celeste with stereo input. The pan setting specified for the Part will also apply to the effect sound.
Adds a jet-airplane effect to the sound.
Adds a jet-airplane effect to the sound.
Adds a jet-airplane effect to the sound.
NO EFFECT
HALL1
HALL2
ROOM1
ROOM2
ROOM3
STAGE1
STAGE2
PLATE
DELAY L, C, R
DELAY L, R
ECHO
CROSS DELAY
EARLY REF1
EARLY REF2
GATE REVERB
REVERSE GATE
KARAOKE 1
KARAOKE 2
KARAOKE 3
CHORUS1
CHORUS2
CHORUS3
CHORUS4
CELESTE1
CELESTE2
CELESTE3
CELESTE4
FLANGER1
FLANGER2
FLANGER3
SYMPHONIC
ROTARY SPEAKER
TREMOLO
AUTO PAN
PHASER1
PHASER2
DISTORTION
OVER DRIVE
AMP SIMULATOR
3BAND EQ (MONO)
2BAND EQ (STEREO)
AUTO WAH (LFO)
THRU
Effect turned off.
Reverb simulating the resonance of a hall.
Reverb simulating the resonance of a hall.
Reverb simulating the resonance of a room.
Reverb simulating the resonance of a room.
Reverb simulating the resonance of a room.
Reverb appropriate for a solo instrument.
Reverb appropriate for a solo instrument.
Reverb simulating a metal plate reverb unit.
A program that creates three delay sounds; L, R, and C (center).
A program that creates two delay sounds; L and R. Two feedback delays are provided.
Two delays (L and R) and independent feedback delays for L and R.
A program that crosses the feedback of two delays.
An effect that produces only the early reflection component of reverb.
An effect that produces only the early reflection component of reverb.
A simulation of gated reverb.
A program that simulates gated reverb played backwards.
A delay with feedback of the same types as used for karaoke reverb.
A delay with feedback of the same types as used for karaoke reverb.
A delay with feedback of the same types as used for karaoke reverb.
Conventional chorus program that add natural spaciousness.
Conventional chorus program that adds natural spaciousness.
Conventional chorus program that adds natural spaciousness.
Chorus with stereo input.
A 3-phase LFO adds modulation and spaciousness to the sound.
A 3-phase LFO adds modulation and spaciousness to the sound.
A 3-phase LFO adds modulation and spaciousness to the sound.
Celeste with stereo input.
Adds a jet-airplane effect to the sound.
Adds a jet-airplane effect to the sound.
Adds a jet-airplane effect to the sound.
A multi-phase version of CELESTE.
A simulation of a rotary speaker. You can use AC1 (assignable controller) etc. to control the speed of rotation.
An effect that cyclically modulates the volume.
A program that cyclically moves that sound image to left and right, front and back.
Cyclically changes the phase to add modulation to the sound.
Phaser with stereo input.
Adds a sharp-edged distortion to the sound.
Adds mild distortion to the sound.
A simulation of a guitar amp.
A mono EQ with adjustable LOW, MID, and HIGH equalizing.
A stereo EQ with adjustable LOW and HIGH. Ideal for drum Parts.
Cyclically modulates the center frequency of a wah filter. With an AC1 etc. this can function as a pedal wah.
Bypass without applying any effect.
MIDI Data Format
NO EFFECT
HALL1
HALL2
ROOM1
ROOM2
ROOM3
STAGE1
STAGE2
PLATE
WHITE ROOM
TUNNEL
BASEMENT
Appendix
Exclusive
MSB
LSB
REVERB
00
00
01
00
01
01
02
00
02
01
02
02
03
00
03
01
04
00
10
00
11
00
13
00
CHORUS
00
00
41
00
41
01
41
02
41
08
42
00
42
01
42
02
42
08
43
00
43
01
43
08
VARIATION
00
00
01
00
01
01
02
00
02
01
02
02
03
00
03
01
04
00
05
00
06
00
07
00
08
00
09
00
09
01
0A
00
0B
00
14
00
14
01
14
02
41
00
41
01
41
02
41
08
42
00
42
01
42
02
42
08
43
00
43
01
43
08
44
00
45
00
46
00
47
00
48
00
48
08
49
00
4A
00
4B
00
4C
00
4D
00
4E
00
40
00
* MSB, LSB is represented in hexadecimal.
* LCB=0 is the basic effect type.
A-37
MIDI Data Format
Effect Parameter List
No Parameter
Range
Value
HALL1, HALL2, ROOM 1, 2, 3, STAGE 1, 2, PLATE
1 Reverb Time
0.3~30.0s
0-69
2 Diffusion
0~10
0-10
3 Initial Delay
0~63
0-63
4 HPF Cutoff
Thru~8.0kHz
0-52
5 LPF Cutoff
1.0k~Thru
34-60
6
7
8
9
10 Dry/Wet
D63>W~D=W~D<W63 1-127
11 Rev Delay
0~63
0-63
12 Density
0~3
0-3
13 Er/Rev Balance E63>R ~ E=R ~ E>R63 1-127
14
15 Feedback Level -63~+63
1-127
16
WHITE ROOM, TUNNEL, BASEMENT
1 Reverb Time
0.3~30.0s
0-69
2 Diffusion
0~10
0-10
3 Initial Delay
0~63
0-63
4 HPF Cutoff
Thru~8.0kHz
0-52
5 LPF Cutoff
1.0k~Thru
34-60
6 Width
0.5~10.2m
0-37
7 Height
0.5~20.2m
0-73
8 Depth
0.5~30.2m
0-104
9 Wall Vary
0~30
0-30
10 Dry/Wet
D63>W~D=W~D<W63 1-127
11 Rev Delay
0~63
0-63
12 Density
0~3
0-3
13 Er/Rev Balance E63>R~E=R~E>R63
1-127
14
15 Feedback Level -63~+63
1-127
16
DELAY L, C, R
1 Lch Delay
0.1~715.0ms
1-7150
2 Rch Delay
0.1~715.0ms
1-7150
3 Cch Delay
0.1~715.0ms
1-7150
4 Feedback Delay 0.1~715.0ms
1-7150
5 Feedback Level -63~+63
1-127
6 Cch Level
0~127
0-127
7 High Damp
0.1~1.0
1-10
8
9
10 Dry/Wet
D63>W~D=W~D<W63 1-127
11
12
13 EQ Low Frequency 50Hz~2.0kHz
8-40
14 EQ Low Gain
-12~+12dB
52-76
15 EQ High Frequency 500Hz~16.0kHz
28-58
16 EQ High Gain
-12~+12dB
52-76
DELAY L, R
1 Lch Delay
0.1~715.0ms
1-7150
2 Rch Delay
0.1~715.0ms
1-7150
3 Feedback Delay1 0.1~715.0ms
1-7150
4 Feedback Delay2 0.1~715.0ms
1-7150
5 Feedback Level -63~+63
1-127
6 High Damp
0.1~1.0
1-10
7
8
9
10 Dry/Wet
D63>W~D=W~D<W63 1-127
11
12
13 EQ Low Frequency 50Hz~2.0kHz
8-40
14 EQ Low Gain
-12~+12dB
52-76
15 EQ High Frequency 500Hz~16.0kHz
28-58
16 EQ High Gain
-12~+12dB
52-76
See
Table
Control
table#4
table#5
table#3
table#3
•
table#5
table#4
table#5
table#3
table#3
table#11
table#11
table#11
•
table#5
•
table#3
table#3
•
table#3
table#3
No Parameter
ECHO
1 Lch Delay1
0.1~355.0ms
2 Lch Feedback Level -63~+63
3 Rch Delay1
0.1~355.0ms
4 Rch Feedback Level -63~+63
5 High Damp
0.1~1.0
6 Lch Delay2
0.1~355.0ms
7 Rch Delay2
0.1~355.0ms
8 Delay2 Level
0~127
9
10 Dry/Wet
D63>W~D=W~D<W63
11
12
13 EQ Low Frequency 50Hz~2.0kHz
14 EQ Low Gain
-12~+12dB
15 EQ High Frequency 500Hz~16.0kHz
16 EQ High Gain
-12~+12dB
CROSS DELAY
1 L->R Delay
0.1~355.0ms
2 R->L Delay
0.1~355.0ms
3 Feedback Level -63~+63
4 Input Select
L, R, L&R
5 High Damp
0.1~1.0
6
7
8
9
10 Dry/Wet
D63>W~D=W~D<W63
11
12
13 EQ Low Frequency 50Hz~2.0kHz
14 EQ Low Gain
-12~+12dB
15 EQ High Frequency 500Hz~16.0kHz
16 EQ High Gain
-12~+12dB
EARLY REF1, EARLY REF2
1 Type
S-H, L-H, Rdm, Rvs, Plt, Spr
2 Room Size
0.1~7.0
3 Diffusion
0~10
4 Initial Delay
0~63
5 Feedback Level -63~+63
6 HPF Cutoff
Thru~8.0kHz
7 LPF Cutoff
1.0k~Thru
8
9
10 Dry/Wet
D63>W~D=W~D<W63
11 Liveness
0~10
12 Density
0~3
13 High Damp
0.1~1.0
14
15
16
GATE REVERB, REVERSE GATE
1 Type
TypeA, TypeB
2 Room Size
0.1~7.0
3 Diffusion
0~10
4 Initial Delay
0~63
5 Feedback Level -63~+63
6 HPF Cutoff
Thru~8.0kHz
7 LPF Cutoff
1.0k~Thru
8
9
10 Dry/Wet
D63>W~D=W~D<W63
11 Liveness
0~10
12 Density
0~3
13 High Damp
0.1~1.0
14
15
16
•
: Can be controlled by AC1 (Assignable Controller 1)
No.*
: These numbers correspond to the Parameter Suffix numbers in <Table 1-3>
See Table** : Refer to “Effect Data Assign Table”
A-38
Range
Value
See
Table
Control
1-3350
1-127
1-3550
1-127
1-10
1-3550
1-3550
0-127
1-127
8-40
52-76
28-58
52-76
•
table#3
table#3
1-3550
1-3550
1-127
0-2
1-10
1-127
8-40
52-76
28-58
52-76
0-5
0-44
0-10
0-63
1-127
0-52
34-60
•
table#3
table#3
table#6
table#5
1-127
0-10
0-3
1-10
0-1
0-44
0-10
0-63
1-127
0-52
34-60
1-127
0-10
0-3
1-10
•
table#6
table#5
•
MIDI Data Format
No Parameter
Range
See
Table
0-127
1-127
0-52
34-60
table#7
1-127
0-127
0-127
1-127
0-127
8-40
52-76
28-58
52-76
1-127
Control
•
table#1
table#2
table#3
table#3
•
0-1
8-40
52-76
28-58
52-76
1-127
table#1
table#2
table#3
table#3
•
4-124
0-127
0-127
0-127
8-40
52-76
28-58
52-76
1-127
table#1
table#2
table#3
table#3
•
Range
ROTARY SPEAKER
1 LFO Frequency 0.00~39.7Hz
2 LFO Depth
0~127
3
4
5
6 EQ Low Frequency 50Hz~2.0kHz
7 EQ Low Gain
-12~+12dB
8 EQ High Frequency 500Hz~16.0kHz
9 EQ High Gain
-12~+12dB
10 Dry/Wet
D63>W~D=W~D<W63
11
12
13
14
15
16
TREMOLO
1 LFO Frequency 0.00~39.7Hz
2 AM Depth
0~127
3 PM Depth
0~127
4
5
6 EQ Low Frequency 50Hz~2.0kHz
7 EQ Low Gain
-12~+12dB
8 EQ High Frequency 500Hz~16.0kHz
9 EQ High Gain
-12~+12dB
10
11
12
13
14
-180~+180deg
15 Input Mode
mono/stereo
16
AUTO PAN
1 LFO Frequency 0.00~39.7Hz
2 L/R Depth
0~127
3 F/R Depth
0~127
4 PAN Direction L<->R, L->R, L<-R,
Lturn, Rturn, L/R
5
6 EQ Low Frequency 50Hz~2.0kHz
7 EQ Low Gain
-12~+12dB
8 EQ High Frequency 500Hz~16.0kHz
9 EQ High Gain
-12~+12dB
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
PHASER1, PHASER2
1 LFO Frequency 0.00~39.7Hz
2 LFO Depth
0~127
3 Phase Shift
0~127
4 Feedback Level -63~+63
5
6 EQ Low Frequency 50Hz~2.0kHz
7 EQ Low Gain
-12~+12dB
8 EQ High Frequency 500Hz~16.0kHz
9 EQ High Gain
-12~+12dB
10 Dry/Wet
D63>W~D=W~D<W63
11 Stage
3~10
12 Diffusion
Mono/Stereo
13 LFO Phase Di
-180~+180deg
14
15
16
Value
See
Table
0-127
0-127
table#1
8-40
52-76
28-58
52-76
1-127
table#3
0-127
0-127
0-127
table#1
8-40
52-76
28-58
52-76
table#3
Control
•
table#3
•
table#3
4-124
0-1
0-127
0-127
0-127
table#1
•
MIDI Data Format
0-127
0-127
1-127
0-63
No Parameter
0-5
8-40
52-76
28-58
52-76
table#3
0-127
0-127
0-127
1-127
table#1
8-40
52-76
28-58
52-76
1-127
3-10
0-1
4-124
table#3
Appendix
KARAOKE 1, 2, 3
1 Delay Time
0~127
2 Feedback Level -63~+63
3 HPF Cutoff
Thru~8.0kHz
4 LPF Cutoff
1.0k~Thru
5
6
7
8
9
10 Dry/Wet
D63>W~D=W~D<W63
11
12
13
14
15
16
CHORUS 1, 2, 3, 4, CELESTE 1, 2, 3, 4
1 LFO Frequency 0.00~39.7Hz
2 LFO PM Depth 0~127
3 Feedback Level -63~+63
4 Delay Offset
0~127
5
6 EQ Low Frequency 50Hz~2.0kHz
7 EQ Low Gain
-12~+12dB
8 EQ High Frequency 500Hz~16.0kHz
9 EQ High Gain
-12~+12dB
10 Dry/Wet
D63>W~D=W~D<W63
11
12
13
14
15 Input Mode
mono/stereo
16
FLANGER 1, 2, 3
1 LFO Frequency 0.00~39.7Hz
2 LFO Depth
0~127
3 Feedback Level -63~+63
4 Delay Offset
0~63
5
6 EQ Low Frequency 50Hz~2.0kHz
7 EQ Low Gain
-12~+12dB
8 EQ High Frequency 500Hz~16.0kHz
9 EQ High Gain
-12~+12dB
10 Dry/Wet
D63>W~D=W~D<W63
11
12
13
14 LFO Phase Difference -180~+180deg
15
16
SYMPHONIC
1 LFO Frequency 0.00~39.7Hz
2 LFO Depth
0~127
3 Delay Offset
0~127
4
5
6 EQ Low Frequency 50Hz~2.0kHz
7 EQ Low Gain
-12~+12dB
8 EQ High Frequency 500Hz~16.0kHz
9 EQ High Gain
-12~+12dB
10 Dry/Wet
D63>W~D=W~D<W63
11
12
13
14
15
16
Value
table#3
table#3
•
•
: Can be controlled by AC1 (Assignable Controller 1)
No.*
: These numbers correspond to the Parameter Suffix numbers in <Table 1-3>
See Table** : Refer to “Effect Data Assign Table”
A-39
MIDI Data Format
No Parameter
Range
DISTORTION, OVERDRIVE
1 Drive
0~127
2 EQ Low Frequency 50Hz~2.0kHz
3 EQ Low Gain
-12~+12dB
4 LPF Cutoff
1.0k~Thru
5 Output Level
0~127
6
7 EQ Mid Frequency 500Hz~10.0kHz
8 EQ Mid Gain
-12~+12dB
9 EQ Mid Width 1.0~12.0
10 Dry/Wet
D63>W~D=W~D<W63
11 Edge (Clip Curve) 0~127
12
13
14
15
16
GUITAR AMP SIMULATOR
1 Drive
0~127
2 AMP Type
Off, Stack, Combo, Tube
3 LPF Cutoff
1.0k~Thru
4 Output Level
0~127
5
6
7
8
9
10 Dry/Wet
D63>W~D=W~D<W63
11 Edge (Clip Curve) 0~127
12
13
14
15
16
3-BAND EQ
1 EQ Low Gain
-12~+12dB
2 EQ Mid Frequency 500Hz~10.0kHz
3 EQ Mid Gain
-12~+12dB
4 EQ Mid Width 1.0~12.0
5 EQ High Gain
-12~+12dB
6 EQ Low Frequency 50Hz~2.0kHz
7 EQ High Frequency 500Hz~16.0kHz
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Value
0-127
8-40
52-76
34-60
0-127
See
Table
Control
•
table#3
table#3
28-54 table#3
52-76
10-120
1-127
0-127 mild ~sharp
0-127
0-3
34-60
0-127
1-127
0-127
•
table#3
mild ~sharp
No Parameter
2-BAND EQ
1 EQ Low Frequency
2 EQ Low Gain
3 EQ High Frequency
4 EQ High Gain
5
6
7
8
9
10
11 EQ Mid Frequency
12 EQ Mid Gain
13 EQ Mid Width
14
15
16
AUTO WAH
1 LFO Frequency
2 LFO Depth
3 Cutoff Frequency
4 Resonance
5
6 EQ Low Frequency
7 EQ Low Gain
8 EQ High Frequency
9 EQ High Gain
10 Dry/Wet
11
12
13
14
15
16
52-76
28-54 table#3
52-76
10-120
52-76
8-40
table#3
28-58 table#3
•
: Can be controlled by AC1 (Assignable Controller 1)
No.*
: These numbers correspond to the Parameter Suffix numbers in <Table 1-3>
See Table** : Refer to “Effect Data Assign Table”
A-40
Range
Value
See
Table
50Hz~2.0kHz
-12~+12dB
500Hz~16.0kHz
-12~+12dB
8-40
52-76
28-58
52-76
table#3
100Hz~10.0kHz
-12~+12dB
1.0~12.0
14-54 table#3
52-76
10-120
0.00~39.7Hz
0~127
0~127
1.0~12.0
0-127 table#1
0-127
0-127
10-120
50Hz~2.0kHz
-12~+12dB
500Hz~16.0kHz
-12~+12dB
D63>W~D=W~D<W63
8-40
52-76
28-58
52-76
1-127
Control
table#3
table#3
table#3
•
MIDI Data Format
Effect Data Assign Table
Table#2
Table#1
Value Data
0.00
43
0.04
44
0.08
45
0.13
46
0.17
47
0.21
48
0.25
49
0.29
50
0.34
51
0.38
52
0.42
53
0.46
54
0.51
55
0.55
56
0.59
57
0.63
58
0.67
59
0.72
60
0.76
61
0.80
62
0.84
63
0.88
64
0.93
65
0.97
66
1.01
67
1.05
68
1.09
69
1.14
70
1.18
71
1.22
72
1.26
73
1.30
74
1.35
75
1.39
76
1.43
77
1.47
78
1.51
79
1.56
80
1.60
81
1.64
82
1.68
83
1.72
84
1.77
85
Value Data
1.81
86
1.85
87
1.89
88
1.94
89
1.98
90
2.02
91
2.06
92
2.10
93
2.15
94
2.19
95
2.23
96
2.27
97
2.31
98
2.36
99
2.40
100
2.44
101
2.48
102
2.52
103
2.57
104
2.61
105
2.65
106
2.69
107
2.78
108
2.86
109
2.94
110
3.03
111
3.11
112
3.20
113
3.28
114
3.37
115
3.45
116
3.53
117
3.62
118
3.70
119
3.87
120
4.04
121
4.21
122
4.37
123
4.54
124
4.71
125
4.88
126
5.05
127
5.22
Value
5.38
5.55
5.72
6.06
6.39
6.73
7.07
7.40
7.74
8.08
8.41
8.75
9.08
9.42
9.76
10.10
10.80
11.40
12.10
12.80
13.50
14.10
14.80
15.50
16.20
16.80
17.50
18.20
19.50
20.90
22.20
23.60
24.90
26.20
27.60
28.90
30.30
31.60
33.00
34.30
37.00
39.70
Value Data
4.3
86
4.4
87
4.5
88
4.6
89
4.7
90
4.8
91
4.9
92
5.0
93
5.1
94
5.2
95
5.3
96
5.4
97
5.5
98
5.6
99
5.7
100
5.8
101
5.9
102
6.0
103
6.1
104
6.2
105
6.3
106
6.4
107
6.5
108
6.6
109
6.7
110
6.8
111
6.9
112
7.0
113
7.1
114
7.2
115
7.3
116
7.4
117
7.5
118
7.6
119
7.7
120
7.8
121
7.9
122
8.0
123
8.1
124
8.2
125
8.3
126
8.4
127
8.5
Table#6
Delay Time (ms)
Data Value Data
0
0.1
43
1
1.7
44
2
3.2
45
3
4.8
46
4
6.4
47
5
8.0
48
6
9.5
49
7 11.1
50
8 12.7
51
9 14.3
52
10 15.8
53
11 17.4
54
12 19.0
55
13 20.6
56
14 22.1
57
15 23.7
58
16 25.3
59
17 26.9
60
18 28.4
61
19 30.0
62
20 31.6
63
21 33.2
64
22 34.7
65
23 36.3
66
24 37.9
67
25 39.5
68
26 41.0
69
27 42.6
70
28 44.2
71
29 45.7
72
30 47.3
73
31 48.9
74
32 50.5
75
33 52.0
76
34 53.6
77
35 55.2
78
36 56.8
79
37 58.3
80
38 59.9
81
39 61.5
82
40 63.1
83
41 64.6
84
42 66.2
85
Value Data
0.0
43
0.1
44
0.2
45
0.3
46
0.4
47
0.5
48
0.6
49
0.7
50
0.8
51
0.9
52
1.0
53
1.1
54
1.2
55
1.3
56
1.4
57
1.5
58
1.6
59
1.7
60
1.8
61
1.9
62
2.0
63
2.1
64
2.2
65
2.3
66
2.4
67
2.5
68
2.6
69
2.7
70
2.8
71
2.9
72
3.0
73
3.1
74
3.2
75
3.3
76
3.4
77
3.5
78
3.6
79
3.7
80
3.8
81
3.9
82
4.0
83
4.1
84
4.2
85
Room Size (m)
Value Data
67.8
86
69.4
87
70.9
88
72.5
89
74.1
90
75.7
91
77.2
92
78.8
93
80.4
94
81.9
95
83.5
96
85.1
97
86.7
98
88.2
99
89.8
100
91.4
101
93.0
102
94.5
103
96.1
104
97.7
105
99.3
106
100.8
107
102.4
108
104.0
109
105.6
110
107.1
111
108.7
112
110.3
113
111.9
114
113.4
115
115.0
116
116.6
117
118.2
118
119.7
119
121.3
120
122.9
121
124.4
122
126.0
123
127.6
124
129.2
125
130.7
126
132.3
127
133.9
Value
135.5
137.0
138.6
140.2
141.8
143.3
144.9
146.5
148.1
149.6
151.2
152.8
154.4
155.9
157.5
159.1
160.6
162.2
163.8
165.4
166.9
168.5
170.1
171.7
173.2
174.8
176.4
178.0
179.5
181.1
182.7
184.3
185.8
187.4
189.0
190.6
192.1
193.7
195.3
196.9
198.4
200.0
Data Value Data Value
0
0.1
43
6.8
1
0.3
44
7.0
2
0.4
3
0.6
4
0.7
5
0.9
6
1.0
7
1.2
8
1.4
9
1.5
10
1.7
11
1.8
12
2.0
13
2.1
14
2.3
15
2.5
16
2.6
17
2.8
18
2.9
19
3.1
20
3.2
21
3.4
22
3.5
23
3.7
24
3.9
25
4.0
26
4.2
27
4.3
28
4.5
29
4.6
30
4.8
31
5.0
32
5.1
33
5.3
34
5.4
35
5.6
36
5.7
37
5.9
38
6.1
39
6.2
40
6.4
41
6.5
42
6.7
Value
8.6
8.7
8.8
8.9
9.0
9.1
9.2
9.3
9.4
9.5
9.6
9.7
9.8
9.9
10.0
11.1
12.2
13.3
14.4
15.5
17.1
18.6
20.2
21.8
23.3
24.9
26.5
28.0
29.6
31.2
32.8
34.3
35.9
37.5
39.0
40.6
42.2
43.7
45.3
46.9
48.4
50.0
Data
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
Value
THRU(20)
22
25
28
32
36
40
45
50
56
63
70
80
90
100
110
125
140
160
180
200
225
250
280
315
355
400
450
500
560
630
700
800
900
1.0k
1.1k
1.2k
1.4k
1.6k
1.8k
2.0k
2.2k
2.5k
Data
Value
43
2.8k
44
3.2k
45
3.6k
46
4.0k
47
4.5k
48
5.0k
49
5.6k
50
6.3k
51
7.0k
52
8.0k
53
9.0k
54
10.0k
55
11.0k
56
12.0k
57
14.0k
58
16.0k
59
18.0k
60 THRU(20.0k)
Table#8
Table#7
Reverb Width; Depth; Height
Delay Time (ms)
Data
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
Value Data
0.1
43
3.2
44
6.4
45
9.5
46
12.7
47
15.8
48
19.0
49
22.1
50
25.3
51
28.4
52
31.6
53
34.7
54
37.9
55
41.0
56
44.2
57
47.3
58
50.5
59
53.6
60
56.8
61
59.9
62
63.1
63
66.2
64
69.4
65
72.5
66
75.7
67
78.8
68
82.0
69
85.1
70
88.3
71
91.4
72
94.6
73
97.7
74
100.9
75
104.0
76
107.2
77
110.3
78
113.5
79
116.6
80
119.8
81
122.9
82
126.1
83
129.2
84
132.4
85
Data Value Data Value
0
0.3
43
4.6
1
0.4
44
4.7
2
0.5
45
4.8
3
0.6
46
4.9
4
0.7
47
5.0
5
0.8
48
5.5
6
0.9
49
6.0
7
1.0
50
6.5
8
1.1
51
7.0
9
1.2
52
7.5
10
1.3
53
8.0
11
1.4
54
8.5
12
1.5
55
9.0
13
1.6
56
9.5
14
1.7
57 10.0
15
1.8
58 11.0
16
1.9
59 12.0
17
2.0
60 13.0
18
2.1
61 14.0
19
2.2
62 15.0
20
2.3
63 16.0
21
2.4
64 17.0
22
2.5
65 18.0
23
2.6
66 19.0
24
2.7
67 20.0
25
2.8
68 25.0
26
2.9
69 30.0
27
3.0
28
3.1
29
3.2
30
3.3
31
3.4
32
3.5
33
3.6
34
3.7
35
3.8
36
3.9
37
4.0
38
4.1
39
4.2
40
4.3
41
4.4
42
4.5
Value Data
135.5
86
138.6
87
141.8
88
144.9
89
148.1
90
151.2
91
154.4
92
157.5
93
160.7
94
163.8
95
167.0
96
170.1
97
173.3
98
176.4
99
179.6
100
182.7
101
185.9
102
189.0
103
192.2
104
195.3
105
198.5
106
201.6
107
204.8
108
207.9
109
211.1
110
214.2
111
217.4
112
220.5
113
223.7
114
226.8
115
230.0
116
233.1
117
236.3
118
239.4
119
242.6
120
245.7
121
248.9
122
252.0
123
255.2
124
258.3
125
261.5
126
264.6
127
267.7
Value
270.9
274.0
277.2
280.3
283.5
286.6
289.8
292.9
296.1
299.2
302.4
305.5
308.7
311.8
315.0
318.1
321.3
324.4
327.6
330.7
333.9
337.0
340.2
343.3
346.5
349.6
352.8
355.9
359.1
362.2
365.4
368.5
371.7
374.8
378.0
381.1
384.3
387.4
390.6
393.7
396.9
400.0
Data Value Data Value Data Value
0
0.5
43 11.8
86 24.2
1
0.8
44 12.1
87 24.5
2
1.0
45 12.3
88 24.9
3
1.3
46 12.6
89 25.2
4
1.5
47 12.9
90 25.5
5
1.8
48 13.1
91 25.8
6
2.0
49 13.4
92 26.1
7
2.3
50 13.7
93 26.5
8
2.6
51 14.0
94 26.8
9
2.8
52 14.2
95 27.1
10
3.1
53 14.5
96 27.5
11
3.3
54 14.8
97 27.8
12
3.6
55 15.1
98 28.1
13
3.9
56 15.4
99 28.5
14
4.1
57 15.6
100 28.8
15
4.4
58 15.9
101 29.2
16
4.6
59 16.2
102 29.5
17
4.9
60 16.5
103 29.9
18
5.2
61 16.8
104 30.2
19
5.4
62 17.1
20
5.7
63 17.3
21
5.9
64 17.6
22
6.2
65 17.9
23
6.5
66 18.2
24
6.7
67 18.5
25
7.0
68 18.8
26
7.2
69 19.1
27
7.5
70 19.4
28
7.8
71 19.7
29
8.0
72 20.0
30
8.3
73 20.2
31
8.6
74 20.5
32
8.8
75 20.8
33
9.1
76 21.1
34
9.4
77 21.4
35
9.6
78 21.7
36
9.9
79 22.0
37 10.2
80 22.4
38 10.4
81 22.7
39 10.7
82 23.0
40 11.0
83 23.3
41 11.2
84 23.6
42 11.5
85 23.9
MIDI Data Format
Table#5
Data
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
Reverb Time (ms)
EQ Frequency (Hz)
Appendix
Data
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
Table#4
Table#3
Modulation Delay Offset (ms)
LFO Frequency (Hz)
A-41
YAMAHA [Disklavier]
Model: E3 Series
MIDI IMPLEMENTATION CHART
Function...
Transmitted
Recognized
Basic
Default
1-16
Channel
Changed
1-16
1-16
Default
3
3
Messages
×
3, 4 (m=1)
Altered
****************
×
0-127
0-127
****************
0-127
Mode
Note
Number
: True voice
Velocity
Note ON
Remarks
1-16
9nH, v=1-127
Date: 01-Aug-2008
Version: 1.00
Memorized
*2, *3
v=1-127
Note OFF
After
Key s
Touch
Ch s
Pitch Bend
*5
×
*1, *2
×
0-24 semi
0, 32
*1, *2
*1, *2
7, 11
*1
1, 5, 10
×
*1, *2
6, 38
×
*2
Data Entry
64
Control
65
Hold1 (Sustain)
×
66
Change
*4
*2
Portament
*2
Sostenuto
67
Soft (Shift) Pedal
71-74, 84
×
*2
91, 93, 94
×
*2
96-101
×
Prog
Change
Effect Depth
*1,*2
0-127
: True #
Bank Select
0-127
*2
****************
System Exclusive
: Song Pos
×
×
Common
: Song Sel
×
×
: Tune
×
×
System
: Clock
×
×
Real Time
: Commands
×
×
Aux
: All Sound OFF
(120, 126, 127)
: Reset All Cntrls
×
: Local ON/OFF
×
(121)
: All Notes OFF
Message
s
: Active Sense
: Reset
Notes
(123-125)
×
×
*5 = Applying further pressure on the key does not output
*1 = Received (transmitted) if switch is on.
key aftertouch information. Instead, key position is
*2 = Only ESBL Part can recognized.
transmitted as additional information.
*3 = m is always treated as 1 regardless of its
value.
*4 = Transmit if this model has a Sostenuto Pedal.
Mode 1 : OMNI ON. POLY
Mode 3 : OMNI OFF. POLY
Mode 2 : OMNI ON. MONO
Mode 4 : OMNI OFF. MONO
×
: YES
: NO
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement